Yamaha Psr 530 Owners Manual

Psr-530-Owners-Manual yamaha-psr-530-owners-manual-133580

PSR-530 Owner's Manual PSR530E

PSR-530 to the manual 8cd22ab7-19a6-4e1d-ac65-1ace31298c5e

Yamaha Corporation PSR-530 Owner's Manual psr530e Yamaha Corporation - PSR-530 - Owner's Manual

: Yamaha Psr-530-Owners-Manual yamaha-psr-530-owners-manual-133580 pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 130 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in

this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly ap-

proved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use

the product.

IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use

only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product

MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow in-

structions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the

USA.

NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements

listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compli-

ance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance

that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in

harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment gener-

ates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to

the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference

harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with

FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in

all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,

which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try

to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:

• Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the

interference.

• Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

• In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.

If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to

co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please

contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If

you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha

Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600

Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America.

This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO

NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than

one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recom-

mended by Yamaha.

This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a

cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is

used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accom-

pany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:

The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the

time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or

modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update

existing units.

This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and head-

phones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that

could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods

of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult

an audiologist.

IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before

damage occurs.

NOTICE:

Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a

function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not

covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners

responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your

dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:

Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-

ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the

production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keep-

ing with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be

aware of the following:

Battery Notice:

This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if

applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of

battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-

essary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the re-

placement.

This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these

may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a

rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery

being charged.

When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batter-

ies of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mis-

matches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery

case rupture.

Warning:

Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all

batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and

as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of

household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:

Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some

reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all

local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-

ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable

to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:

The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model

number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this

plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the

date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual

as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model

Serial No.

Purchase Date

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

92-BP

1

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televi-

sions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can

affect proper operation of the other products.

• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might acciden-

tally fall over.

• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other

cables.

• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint

thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.

Also, do not place vinyl or plastic objects on the instrument, since this might

discolor the panel or keyboard.

• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and

do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand,

use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the

internal components or result in the instrument falling over.

• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncom-

fortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you

experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

■ SAVING USER DATA

• Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer

MDF2, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunc-

tion or user operating error.

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifi-

cations to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.

Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or

modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts.

If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and

have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet

conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into

any openings.

• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a

sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells

or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instru-

ment inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Use the specified adaptor (PA-6 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)

only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or

overheating.

• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the

outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may

have accumulated on it.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the

instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or

radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place

heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on,

trip over, or roll anything over it.

• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always

hold the plug itself and not the cord.

• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-con-

nector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause over-

heating in the outlet.

• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during

electrical storms.

• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/–

polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or bat-

tery fluid leakage.

• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries

together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline

batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or

different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause over-

heating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.

• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.

• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.

• If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries

from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery.

• Keep batteries away from children.

• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off

the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all com-

ponents, set all volume levels to minimum.

• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme

cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the

day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the inter-

nal components.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,

short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

(4)

2

Congratulations!

VOICE R2 VOICE R1

51 1

andPno

REGISTRATION

Important Features

Touch-sensitive 61-key keyboard for a wide

range of dynamic musical expression.

An outstanding range of 200 panel voices

and 12 drum kits, plus a full set of 480 XG voices.

Voice set feature automaticaly selects the

appropriate voice parameter settings for the panel

voices.

Advanced auto-accompaniment technol-

ogy gives you 100 fully-orchestrated accompani-

ment “styles” to back up what you play on the

keyboard.

One Touch Setting feature automatically

selects appropriate voice, effect, and other set-

tings for the selected accompaniment style — all

you have to do is select a style and play.

Large multi-function LCD display panel

makes it easy to select and edit parameters.

Registration Memory saves your favorite

panel settings for instant recall when needed.

Digital effects add depth and ambience to

your sound.

Minus-one and Repeat functions are ideal

for learning new songs and polishing your key-

board technique.

You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard. The Yamaha PSR-530 PortaTone

combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics

and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment. A large graphic

display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument.

In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and extensive performance potential,

we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep

the manual in a safe place for later reference.

Virtual Arranger feature lets you add chord

progressions to any of the auto-accompaniment

styles for more musical, refined accompaniment.

3

MULTI PAD

Song recording feature lets you record

four melody tracks with an accompaniment track.

Multi Pads record and play short rhythmic

and melodic sequences that can be used to add

impact and variety to your performances.

Optional Yamaha Music Cartridges can be

plugged in for enjoyable automated performance,

keyboard practice, and extra accompaniment

styles.

Built-in amplifier and speaker system de-

livers top-quality sound without the need for ex-

ternal equipment.

A range of MIDI functions for expanded

musical enjoyment (General MIDI System Level

1 and Yamaha XG compatible).

◆Packing List

Create original accmpaniment styles with

the User Style feature.

• PSR-530

• Music Stand

• Music Cartridge

• Owner’s manual

XG

XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha which

significantly improves and expands upon the “GM Sys-

tem Level 1” standard by providing a greater variety of

high-quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect

operation while being fully compatible with GM.

PSR-530 supports the XG format.

GM System Level 1

“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI

standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music

data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible

tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM

mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that

support the “GM System Level 1”.

PSR-530 supports GM System Level 1.

4

Contents

Panel Controls 6

The Music Stand .................................................... 7

Basic Display Operation 8

The Display Icons............................................................ 8

The Menus .....................................................................10

Shortcuts .............................................................11

Setting Up 12

Power Supply.................................................................12

Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor ................... 12

Using Batteries ...................................................... 12

Connections ..................................................................13

The PHONES Jack ................................................ 13

SUSTAIN Jack ....................................................... 13

The AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ........................ 13

MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors............... 13

The Demonstration 14

Playing the PSR-530 16

The PSR-530 Voices ...................................................... 16

A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices.......... 16

Selecting & Playing Voices ........................................... 17

Keyboard Percussion ............................................ 19

The Dual Voice Mode..................................................... 19

The Split Voice Mode..................................................... 20

Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point ....................... 21

Auto Accompaniment 22

Using Auto Accompaniment ........................................ 22

The Synchro Stop Function ................................... 26

Using Virtual Arranger .................................................. 27

Accompaniment Track Muting ..................................... 27

Muting Individual Tracks ........................................ 28

Accompaniment Volume Control ................................. 28

Changing the Accompaniment Split Point.................. 29

Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

and SPLIT VOICE Split Points .......................... 30

The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes .............. 30

The Stop Accompaniment Function ....................... 34

One Touch Setting ......................................................... 34

Digital Effects 36

Reverb ............................................................................36

Turning the Reverb Effect On or Off ............................36

Selecting a Reverb Type..............................................37

Reverb Return Level ....................................................38

Chorus ............................................................................38

Turning the Chorus Effect On or Off ............................38

Selecting a Chorus Effect ............................................39

Chorus Return Level ...................................................39

DSP .................................................................................40

Turning the DSP Effect On or Off ................................41

Selecting a DSP Effect ................................................41

DSP Return Level ........................................................42

Harmony .........................................................................42

Turning the Harmony Effect On or Off .........................43

Selecting a Harmony Type ..........................................43

Adjusting the Harmony Volume ...................................44

The Pitch Bend Wheel 45

Setting the Pitch Bend Range ......................................45

Transpose 46

Setting Transposition ....................................................46

Registration Memory 47

Registering the Panel Settings ....................................47

Recall the Registered Panel Settings ..........................48

The Accompaniment Freeze Function ........................48

The Multi Pads 49

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set ...........................................49

Playing the MULTI PADs ...............................................50

Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off ............51

Song Playback 52

Song Playback Procedure ............................................52

Song Volume Control ....................................................53

Play from a Specified Measure ....................................54

Minus-one Practice .......................................................55

Minus-one Track Assignment ......................................55

Repeat Play ....................................................................57

5

Song Recording 58

Song Recording Procedure .......................................... 59

About the Recording with

the Digital Effects Applied ................................ 62

Clearing Song Data ....................................................... 63

Clearing an Entire Song ..............................................63

Clearing Selected Melody Tracks ................................ 63

Style Recording 64

Style Recording Procedure .......................................... 64

Drum Cancel ...............................................................68

Quantize ......................................................................69

Clearing User Style Data .............................................. 70

Clearing an Entire Style ..............................................70

Clearing Selected Style Tracks .................................... 70

Multi Pad Recording 71

MUTI PAD Recording Procedure .................................. 71

Clearing MULTI PAD Data ............................................. 74

Clearing an Entire Pad Set ..........................................74

Clearing Selected MULTI PADs ................................... 74

Using Music Cartridges 75

Inserting a Music Cartridge ................................... 75

Music Cartridge Handling Precautions ................... 75

Cartridge Songs ............................................................ 76

Cartridge Song Playback ............................................ 76

Cartridge Accompaniment Styles ............................... 77

Revoicing 78

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices ............................. 78

Revoicing a Style...........................................................80

Revoicing a User Song ................................................. 81

Overall Functions 83

Touch Sensitivity .................................................... 84

Pitch Bend Range .................................................84

Master Tuning ........................................................84

Scale Tuning ..........................................................84

Song Transpose ..................................................... 85

Metronome ............................................................85

Split Voice Split Point ............................................. 85

Accompaniment Split Point .................................... 85

Fingering Mode .....................................................85

Voice Set ............................................................... 85

MIDI Functions 86

What’s MIDI? .................................................................. 86

MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal ....................... 88

What You Can Do with MIDI .......................................... 88

Connecting to a Personal Computer

(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch) ............ 90

Connect using the PSR-530 MIDI terminals.......... 90

Connect using the TO HOST terminal ................... 91

The PSR-530 MIDI Functions ....................................... 92

Transmit Channel & Transmit Track........................ 92

Receive Channel & Receive Mode ....................... 93

Local Control .........................................................94

Clock...................................................................... 94

Bulk Data Send...................................................... 95

Initial Data Send .................................................... 95

Appendix

PSR-530 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure ........... 96

Data Backup & Initialization ......................................... 98

Data Backup ..........................................................98

Data Initialization ................................................... 98

Voice List .......................................................................99

Maximum Polyphony ............................................. 99

Drum Kit List................................................................ 104

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) ............. 106

When DSP type Is

Selected as a System Effect ............................ 106

When DSP type Is

Selected as a Insertion Effect ..........................107

Troubleshooting .......................................................... 109

MIDI Data Format......................................................... 110

MIDI Implementation Chart ........................................ 122

Specifications ..............................................................124

Index .............................................................................125

6

CLICK

36 37

C1

TS

39

R

41

F1

4238

D1 40

E1

L

43

G1

45

A1

47

B1

48

C2

50

D2

52

E2

53

F2

55

G2

L

46

M

51

H

44

MH

49

LH

54

MIN MAX

ON

STAND BY

MASTER

VOLUME

ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

TEMPO

TRANSPOSE

ON/

OFF

AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT

MAIN/AUTO FILL

INTRO

AB

SYNC

STOP

SYNC

START

8BEAT

1 8BEAT POP 1

2 8BEAT POP 2

3 8BT UPTEMPO

4 8BT STANDARD

5 FOLKROCK

6 POP ROCK 1

7 POP ROCK 2

8 8BEAT MEDIUM

9 8BEAT BALLAD

10 EPIC BALLAD

11 PIANO BALLAD

16BEAT

12 16BEAT POP

13 16BT SHUFFLE 1

14 16BT SHUFFLE 2

15 16BT BALLAD 1

16 16BT BALLAD 2

17 16BT BALLAD 3

18 FUNK 1

19 SOUL BALLAD

20 FUSION BALLAD

6/8 BALLAD

21 SLOW ROCK 1

22 SLOW ROCK 2

23 6/8 BALLAD

DANCE

24 DANCE POP 1

25 DANCE POP 2

26 TECHNO

27 EUROBEAT

28 EURO HOUSE

29 HIP HOP

30 SYNTH BOOGIE

DISCO

31 70S DISCO

32 DISCO TROP

33 POLKA POP

ROCK

34 8BT ROCK BLD

35 16BT ROCK BLD

36 HARD ROCK

37 ROCK SHUFFLE

38 6/8HVY ROCK

39 US ROCK

40 16BEAT ROCK

RHYTHM & BLUES

41 R&B

42 FUNK 2

43 SOUL

44 GOSPEL SHUFFLE

45 6/8 GOSPEL

46 4/4 BLUES

ROCK & ROLL

47 ROCK&ROLL 1

48 ROCK&ROLL 2

49 BOOGIE

50 TWIST

C & W

51 BLUEGRASS 1

52 BLUEGRASS 2

53 COUNTRY 2/4

54 8BT COUNTRY

55 COUNTRY ROCK

56 COWBOY BOOG

57 C BALLAD

58 C SHUFFLE

59 C WALTZ

AMERICAS

60 CAJUN

61 BANDA

62 MARIACHI

63 TEJANO

64 CUMBIA

TRAD JAZZ

65 SWING

66 B B SWING

67 B B BALLAD

68 JAZZ QUARTET

69 DIXIELAND

CONTEMP JAZZ

70 COOL JAZZ

71 JAZZ BALLAD

72 JAZZ WALTZ

73 FUSION

LATIN

74 BOSSA NOVA 1

75 BOSSA NOVA 2

76 BOSSA NOVA 3

77 SALSA

78 SAMBA

79 MAMBO

80 BEGUINE

81 MERENGUE

REVERB

HACHORUS

DIGITAL EF

F

DSP

Panel Controls

■Top Panel Controls

qSTAND BY/ON Switch ................................. page 14

wMASTER VOLUME Control ......................... page 14

eDEMO Button ............................................... page 14

rTEMPO Buttons ........................................... page 23

tTRANSPOSE Buttons.................................. page 46

yACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

Buttons ................................................. pages 28, 53

uAUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SECTION

• AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

ON/OFF Button ......................................... page 23

• SYNC STOP Button .................................. page 26

• SYNC START Button ................................ page 24

• INTRO Button ........................................... page 24

• MAIN/AUTO FILL A & B Buttons ............... page 24

• ENDING Button......................................... page 26

iRECORD Button ............................ pages 59, 65, 71

oSTART/STOP Button...................... pages 15, 24, 26

!0 DIGITAL EFFECT SECTION

• REVERB Button ........................................ page 36

• CHORUS Button ....................................... page 38

• DSP Button ............................................... page 41

• VARIATION Button.................................... page 41

• HARMONY Button .................................... page 43

!1 DISPLAY & RELATED CONTROLS

• DISPLAY ..................................................... page 8

• MENU Buttons .......................................... page 10

• SUB MENU Buttons.................................. page 10

• VOICE Button ........................................... page 10

• STYLE Button ........................................... page 10

• SONG Button ............................................ page 10

• CARTRIDGE Button ................................. page 10

• REVOICE Button ...................................... page 78

• TRACK Buttons............... pages 19, 20, 28, 60, 79

!2 REGISTRATION MEMORY SECTION

• MEMORY Button....................................... page 48

• 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons....................................... page 48

• FREEZE Button ........................................ page 48

!3 ONE TOUCH SETTING Button.................... page 35

!4 NUMBER Buttons ........................................ page 17

!5 + and – Buttons .................................... pages 15, 17

!6 Data Dial ...................................................... page 18

q

w

er

t

y

!0

!7 MUSIC CARTRIDGE Slot ............................ page 75

!8 KEYBOARD SECTION

• DUAL VOICE Button ................................. page 19

• SPLIT VOICE Button ................................ page 20

!9 MULTI PAD SECTION

• STOP Button ............................................. page 50

• 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons ............................... pages 50, 72

@0 Keyboard ...................................................... page 18

@1 PITCH BEND Wheel .................................... page 45

@2 PHONES Jack ............................................. page 13

@2

TO HOST

u

@1

@3

7

57

A2

59

B2

60

C3

62

D3

64

E3

65

F3

67

G3

69

A3

71

B3

72

C4

74

D4

76

E4

77

F4

79

G4

81

A4

83

B4

84

C5

86

D5

88

E5

89

F5

91

G5

93

A5

95

B5

96

C6

L

5856

HRS

M

LM

HC

1

61

C

2

70

R

1

63

R

2

66

H

68

L

73

H

75

LHL

78

H L

80

H

82

L

85

H

87

L

90 9492

KEYBOARD

DUAL VOICE

SPLIT VOICE

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

START/STOP

/

ENDING

PSR-530

REGISTRATION MEMORY

4321

FREEZE STOP

21

MUTLI PAD

43

SPLIT VOICE

DUAL VOICE

HARMONY

REVERB

MULTI PAD STOP

REGIST MEMORY REGIST BANK

ACMP ON / OFF

SHORTCUT

MULTI PAD SET

REVERB TYPE

HARMONY TYPE

FINGERING

REVOICE R2

REVOICE L

CHORUS TYPE

DSP TYPE

DSP TYPE

PRESS AND HOLD FOR A WHILE.

PANEL VOICE

58~73

1~18

19~30

31~57

PIANO

CHROMATIC PERCUSSION

ORGAN

GUITAR

127 ~ 140

74~88

89 ~ 100

119 ~ 126

101 ~ 118

BASS

SOLO STRINGS

ENSEMBLE

SOLO BRASS

BRASS ENSEMBLE

201 ~ 212

141 ~ 155

156 ~ 163

182 ~ 200

164 ~ 181

REED

PIPE

SYNTH LEAD

SYNTH PAD

DRUM KITS

XG VOICE

308 ~ 336

337 ~ 378

213 ~ 251

252 ~ 271

272 ~ 307

PIANO

CHROMATIC PERCUSSION

ORGAN

GUITAR

BASS

478 ~ 513 SYNTH LEAD

652 ~ 692 SFX

470 ~ 477

379 ~ 390

391 ~ 424

457 ~ 469

425 ~ 456

STRINGS

ENSEMBLE

BRASS

REED

PIPE

643 ~ 651

514 ~ 542

543 ~ 598

620 ~ 642

599 ~ 619

SYNTH PAD

SYNTH EFFECTS

ETHNIC

PERCUSSIVE

SOUND EFFECTS

CHORUS

DSP

VARIATION

82 BOLERO LENTO

83 ESPAGNOLE

CARIBBEAN

84 REGGAE 12

85 POP REGGAE

BALLROOM LATIN

86 CHA CHA

87 RHUMBA

88 PASODOBLE

89 TANGO

BALLROOM STD

90 FOXTROT

91 JIVE

MARCH & WALTZ

92 MARCH 1

93 MARCH 2

94 6/8 MARCH

95 POLKA

96 STANDARD WALTZ

97 POP WALTZ

98 GERMAN WALTZ

99 VIEN WALTZ

100 MUSETTE

A

RMONY

F

ECT

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION

1234

MULTI PAD

1234

RHYTHM

2

FREEZE

LR2R1

mM

7

001

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

GrandPno

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

AB

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE SPLIT DUAL

CHORUS DSP

VARIATION

OVERALL

REGIST

MEMORY

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

MULTI PAD

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

REVOICE

TRACK

Panel Controls

◆The Music Stand

DC IN 10-12V

INHOST SELECT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

MIDI OUT R

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

AUX OUT

L/L+RSUSTAIN

!1

!2

!4

!6

@0

■Rear Panel Controls

@3 TO HOST Connector.................................... page 88

@4 HOST SELECT Switch................................. page 90

@5 MIDI IN and OUT Connectors ...................... page 88

@6 SUSTAIN Jack ............................................. page 13

@7 AUX OUT R, L/L+R Jacks ............................ page 13

@8 DC IN 10-12V Jack ...................................... page 12 The PSR-530 is supplied with a music stand

that can be attached to the instrument by insert-

ing it into the slot at the rear of the control panel.

!3

o

!9

i

!5

!7

!8

@4 @5 @6 @7 @8

8

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION

1234 MULTI PAD

1234

RHYTHM

2

FREEZE

LR2R1

mM7

001

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

GrandPno

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

AB

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE SPLIT DUAL

CHORUS DSP VARIATION

Basic Display Operation

The PSR-530 LCD panel is a large multi-function type that simultaneously displays and

provides access to a number of important parameters. Basic operation of the display as well

as the MENU and SUB MENU buttons, and the meaning of the icons which appear in the

display, are summarized briefly below.

The Display Icons

REVERB

Appears when the REVERB ef-

fect is turned on (page 36).

HARMONY

Appears when the HARMONY

effect is turned on (page 43).

CHORUS

Appears when the CHORUS ef-

fect is turned on (page 38).

TRANSPOSE

The current transpose value

(page 46).

TEMPO

Shows the current tempo of ac-

companiment/song playback

(page 23).

DSP

Appears when the DSP effect is

turned on (page 41).

DSP VARIATION

Appears when the DSP ef-

fect variation is turned on

(page 41).

CART (Cartridge)

Appears when a Music Cartridge song or

style is selected (page 76).

XG

Appears when one of the PSR-530’s XG

voices is selected (page 16).

VOICE L, VOICE R2, and VOICE R1

The currently selected L (Left-hand), R2 (Right-hand

2) and R1 (Right-hand 1) voice numbers are dis-

played in these display locations (page 16).

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

0

116

DSP

VARIATION

9

Basic Display Operation

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACKS

The top row of 8 icons light to indicate which of the 8 possible

accompaniment tracks are being used for accompaniment play-

back. They are also used to specify tracks when using the

REVOICE function (page 27).

REPEAT

Indicates the “A” and “B” repeat points

when programming a repeat section,

and whether REPEAT PLAY is on or

off (page 57).

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Appears when the ONE TOUCH SET-

TING feature is engaged (page 34).

REGISTRATION 1 … 4

(Registration Memory)

Indicates the currently selected REG-

ISTRATION MEMORY or ONE

TOUCH SETTING number (page 47).

FREEZE

Appears when the REGISTRATION

MEMORY “FREEZE” function is on

(page 48).

MULTI PAD 1 … 4

Indicates the currently playing MULTI

PAD number (page 50).

BEAT

Flashes at the current tempo and

indicates the current beat during

accompaniment and song playback.

(page 25)

MEASURE

Indicates the current measure num-

ber during song recording and play-

back (page 54).

SYNC STOP

Appears when the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT SYNC STOP function

is engaged (page 26).

FINGERING

Shows the currently selected fin-

gering mode (page 30).

CHORD

Displays the current chord name

during AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

playback or SONG recording/play-

back (page 25).

MELODY TRACKS 1 … 4, ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK

These icons indicate the playback on/off status of each song

track, and are used to specify tracks for song recording (page 60).

They are also used to specify tracks when using the REVOICE

function (page 81).

VOICE L, VOICE R2, VOICE R1

These icons indicate the on/off status of the L, R2, and R1 voices

when the DUAL VOICE and/or SPLIT VOICE functions are used

(page 16). They are also used to specify tracks when using the

REVOICE function (page 79).

VOLUME

These icons show the volume (actually velocity) of each accom-

paniment track during accompaniment playback, the volume of

the melody and accompaniment tracks during song playback, and

the volume of the R1, R2 and L voices (page 16).

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

MINUS ONE SPLIT DUAL

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

MINUS ONE SPLIT DUAL

AB

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1234

FREEZE

1

mM7

1234

10

OVERALL

REGIST

MEMORY

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

MULTI PAD

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION

1234 MULTI PAD

1234

RHYTHM

2

FREEZE

LR2R1

mM7

001

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

GrandPno

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

AB

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE SPLIT DUAL

CHORUS DSP VARIATION

Basic Display Operation

The Menus

The buttons to the right of the display directly select one of the PSR-530’s

four main function menus: VOICE, STYLE, SONG, and CARTRIDGE. The

currently selected menu is indicated by a triangular indicator in the display

next to the menu list printed immediately to the right of the display panel.

In addition to the menus and functions which are available directly via the

PSR-530 panel controls, there is also a range of important “background”

functions which can be selected via the MENU and SUB MENU [▲] and

[▼] buttons.

The MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons are used to select the menu: REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY, MULTI PAD, MIDI, DIGITAL EFFECT, or OVERALL. The

currently selected MENU category is indicated by a triangular indicator in

the display next to the menu list printed immediately to the left of the

display panel. All of the listed menu categories can be selected by

pressing either the MENU [▲] or [▼] button as many times as necessary

until the triangular indicator in the display appears next to the name of the

desired category. Once a MENU has been selected, the SUB MENU [▲]

and [▼] buttons can be used to select the desired function. The SUB

MENU functions will be described in detail in the appropriate chapters

throughout this manual.

11

Shortcuts

To make operation as easy and as efficient as possible, the PSR-530 features a

number of “shortcuts” which allow you to jump directly to certain functions without

having to use the MENU and SUB MENU buttons. All of these shortcuts work in the

same way: press and hold a panel button for a few seconds to go to the related function.

For example, if you press and hold the [REVERB] button for a few seconds, you will

go directly to the REVERB type selection function. The shortcut buttons and the

functions they access are listed on the PSR-530 panel, near the upper left corner of the

display. The shorcuts will also be described where appropriate throughout this manual.

Reverb

REVERB

Basic Display Operation

12

Setting Up

This section contains information about setting up your PSR-530 and preparing to play. Be

sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR-530.

Power Supply

Although the PSR-530 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries,

Yamaha recommends use of the more environmentally safe AC adaptor. Follow

the instructions below according to the power source you intend to use.

■Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor

zPlug an optional Yamaha PA-6 Power Adaptor into a wall AC outlet.

xThen plug the DC output cable from the PA-6 into the DC IN 10-12V jack on

the rear panel of the PSR-530. The internal batteries are automatically

disconnected when an AC Power Adaptor is used.

■Using Batteries

For battery operation the PSR-530 requires six 1.5V SUM-1, “D” size, R-20 or

equivalent batteries.

When the batteries need to be replaced “LoBattry” may appear on top of the

display, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other

problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the

batteries.

Replace the batteries as follows:

zOpen the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel.

xInsert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on

the inside of the compartment.

cReplace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place.

DC IN 10-12V

PA-6

• When the batteries run

down, replace them with a

complete set of six new

batteries. NEVER mix old

and new batteries.

• Do not use different kinds

of batteries (e.g. alkaline

and manganese) at the

same time.

• If the instrument is not to

be in use for a long time,

remove the batteries from

it, in order to prevent pos-

sible fluid leakage from

the battery.

• Plugging or unplugging

the AC power adaptor

while the batteries are in-

stalled will reset the PSR-

530 to the defaults.

When turning the power OFF, simply reverse the procedure.

• Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-6

AC Power Adaptor (or

other adaptor specifically

recommended by

Yamaha) to power your

instrument from the AC

mains. The use of other

adaptors may result in ir-

reparable damage to both

the adaptor and the PSR-

530.

• Unplug the AC Power

Adaptor when not using

the PSR-530, or during

electrical storms.

• Never interrupt the power

supply (e.g. remove the

batteries or unplug the

AC adaptor) during any

PSR-530 record opera-

tion! Doing so can result

in a loss of data.

13

Setting Up

Connections

■The PHONES Jack

A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or

late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when

a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack.

■SUSTAIN Jack

An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch can be plugged into the rear-panel

SUSTAIN jack for sustain control. The footswitch functions like the damper pedal on

a piano — press for sustain, release for normal sound.

• Be sure that you do

not press the foot-

switch while turning

the power on. If you

do, the ON/OFF status

of the footswitch will

be reversed.

• Some voices may

sound continuously or

have a long decay af-

ter the notes have

been released while

the sustain pedal

(footswitch) is held.

■MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors

See page 88.

SUSTAIN

R

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

AUX OUT

L/L+R

Stereo

System

■The AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks

The rear-panel AUX OUT R and L/L+R jacks deliver the output of the PSR-530

for connection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound system, a mixing console, or tape

recorder. If you will be connecting the PSR-530 to a monaural sound system, use only

the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and right-

channel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you don’t lose any

of the PSR-530 sound.

14

The Demonstration

Once you’ve set up your PSR-530, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstration songs.

A total of 12 demo songs are provided.

1Switch ON

Turn the power ON by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.

2Set an Initial Volume Level

Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] control up (clockwise) about a quarter-turn

from its minimum position. You can re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME]

control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins.

3Press the [DEMO] Button

Press the [DEMO] button to start demo playback. The PSR-530 SONG

menu will automatically be selected and the number and name of the first demo

song will appear on the top line of the display. The demo will begin playing

automatically. The demo songs will play in sequence, and the sequence will

repeat until stopped.

01

PeterGun

MIN MAX

MASTER

VOLUME

ON

STAND B

Y

• If you play the PSR-530 with

the volume at its maximum

level when the batteries are

used, the life of the batteries

will be shorter.

• You can play along on the

PSR-530 keyboard while the

demonstration is playing.

• The volume icons will move in

response to the data in each

track while the demonstration

plays.

• Even when the switch is in

the “STAND BY” position,

electricity is still flowing to

the instrument at the mini-

mum level. When you are not

using the PSR-530 for a long

time, make sure you unplug

the AC power adoptor from

the wall AC outlet, and/or re-

move the batteries from the

instrument.

15

4Skip to the Beginning Of a Different Demo Song

While the demonstration is playing you can select any of the demo songs by

using the [–] and [+] buttons. Playback will skip to the beginning of the selected

song.

5Stop When Done

Press the [DEMO] button or the [START/STOP] button to stop demo playback.

02

R&B

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

START/STOP

/

• Demo playback can be re-

started after it has been

stopped by pressing the

[START/STOP] button. In

this case the selected

demo song will play

through to the end and

then playback will stop au-

tomatically.

• Since playing the demo

automatically selects the

SONG menu, the SONG

menu will remain active

when demo playback is

stopped. To select and

play voices after stopping

the demo, for example,

you will have to press the

[VOICE] button to go to

the VOICE menu. The

same applies for other

menus.

The Demonstration

16

Playing the PSR-530

The PSR-530 Voices

The PSR-530 actually includes two voice sets: the “panel” voices and percussion

kits, and the XG voices. The panel voices include 200 “pitched” voices (voice

numbers 1 through 200) and 12 percussion kits (numbers 201 through 212), while the

XG voice set includes 480 voices (voice numbers 213 through 692).

Panel voices 1… 200

Panel drum kits 201 … 212

XG voices 213 … 692

The R2 and L voices will be discussed in more detail in the DUAL VOICE and

SPLIT VOICE sections. For now we’ll describe how to select and play the main R1

voice.

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

SPLIT DUAL

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

SPLIT DUAL

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

SPLIT DUAL

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

SPLIT DUAL

R1 Voice

R1 Voice + R2 Voice

R1 Voice

L Voice

R1 Voice + R2 Voice

L Voice

(Split Voice Mode + Dual Voice Mode)

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

■A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices

The PSR-530 allows up to three voices to be selected at the same time: “R1” (Right-

hand 1), “R2”, (Right-hand 2) and “L” (Left-hand). Only the “R1” voice is used when

you’re playing a single voice over the entire range of the keyboard. When you’re using

the DUAL VOICE and/or SPLIT VOICE modes (decribed on pages 19 and 20),

however, the “R2” and/or “L” voice will be used as well. The numbers of the currently

selected R1, R2, and L voices are all shown on the display panel.

See the “Voice List” on page 99.

17

Playing the PSR-530

Selecting & Playing Voices

Here’s how you can select and play the panel voices.

1Select the VOICE Menu

Press the [VOICE] button so that the triangular indicator appears in the display next

to “VOICE” to the right of the display. The number and name of the currently selected

“R1” voice appears on the top line of the display panel when the VOICE menu is

selected.

2Select a Panel Voice

The PSR-530 voices can be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons, the number

buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE] button.

001

VOICE R1

1

GrandPno

VOICE

●The [–] and [+] Buttons

When the VOICE menu is selected these buttons step up or down through the PSR-

530’s voices. Press either button briefly to step to the next voice in the correspond-

ing direction, or hold the button to scroll rapidly through the voices in the

corresponding direction.

●The Number Buttons

The number buttons can be used to directly enter the number of the desired voice,

thereby immediately selecting that voice without having to step through a number

of other voices. To select voice number 109 (TremoloStrs), for example, press the

[1], [0], and [9] number buttons in sequence.

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

109

Trem.Str

VOICE R1

109

78

0

9

NO YES

002

BritePno

VOICE R1

2

18

Playing the PSR-530

One- or two-digit voice numbers can be entered without leading zeros. To select

voice number “23” (SteelDrums), for example, simply press the [2] button and then

the [3] button. The bars below the voice number on the display will flash for a few

seconds, and then disappear when the selected voice number has been recognized

by the PSR-530.

One- or two-digit voice numbers can also be entered with leading zeroes: e.g. “23”

can be entered as “023” by pressing the [0], [2], and [3] buttons. In this case the

specified voice number will be immediately recognized by the PSR-530.

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

023

SteelDrm

VOICE R1

23

●The [VOICE] Button

Pressing the [VOICE] button increments the voice number. Press briefly to

increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing.

VOICE

3Play & Adjust Volume

You can now play the selected voice on the PSR-530 keyboard. Use the [MASTER

VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level.

If the Voice Set function (page 85) is turned “on”, whenever a panel voice is selected

appropriate “R2” and “L” voices (i.e. DUAL VOICE and SPLIT VOICE modes) as

well as digital effects, etc., will be automatically selected at the same time.

MIN MAX

MASTER

VOLUME

• The PSR-530’s XG

voices are selected in

the same way as the

panel voices, as de-

scribed above.

• When a XG voice is

selected the XG icon

will appear below the

voice number.

• Refer to page 99 for a

complete list of the

panel and XG voices.

●The Data Dial

Simply rotate the dial clockwise to increment the voice number, or counter-

clockwise to decrement the voice number.

19

Playing the PSR-530

◆Keyboard Percussion

When one of the 12 panel DRUM KIT voices are selected (voice numbers 201

through 212) you can play different drums and percussion instruments on the

keyboard. The drums and percussion instruments played by the various keys are

marked by symbols above the keys.

● The Drum Kits

201 Standard Kit1

202 Standard Kit2

203 Room Kit

204 Rock Kit

205 Electronic Kit

206 Analog Kit

The Dual Voice Mode

When the DUAL VOICE mode is engaged you can play two voices (the R1 and R2

voices) simultaneously across the entire keyboard.

The DUAL VOICE mode is turned on and off by pressing the [DUAL VOICE]

button. When the DUAL VOICE mode is turned on both R1 and R2 icons in the display

will light. Press the [DUAL VOICE] button a second time to turn the DUAL VOICE

mode off: the R2 icon in the display will go out leaving only the R1 icon lit.

The R2 TRACK button below the display can also be used to turn the R2 voice on

or off, only when a frame appears around the voice icons, or in the Song mode

including the Demo song playback.

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

DUAL

TRACK

MINUS ONE

• The HARMONY effect

(page 42) cannot be

turned on while a

drum kit is selected

for the “R1” voice, and

will automatically be

turned off if a drum kit

is selected while

HARMONY is on.

• The TRANSPOSE pa-

rameter (page 46) has

no effect on the drum

kit voices.

• See page 104 for a

complete listing of the

keyboard percussion

drum instrument as-

signments.

• The R1/R2 voice set-

tings can be changed

as required by using

the REVOICE func-

tion, described on

page 78.

• The R1 voice cannot

be turned off.

• The DUAL VOICE

mode can be used at

the same time as the

SPLIT VOICE mode,

described below. In

this case the L voice

is played on the left-

hand section of the

keyboard while both

the R1 and R2 voices

are played on the

right-hand section of

the keyboard. See the

“The Split Voice

Mode” section, below,

for more information.

201

VOICE R1

201

Std.Kit1

VOICE

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

DUAL

DUAL VOICE

207 Dance Kit

208 Jazz Kit

209 Brush Kit

210 Classic Kit

211 SFX Kit 1

212 SFX Kit 2

20

Playing the PSR-530

The Split Voice Mode

The SPLIT VOICE mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands.

You could, for example, play bass with the left hand (the L voice) while playing piano

with the right (the R1 or R1 and R2 voices). The “split point” is initially set at B2 (note

number 59), but it can be set at any key on the keyboard.

• The L/R1/R2 voice

settings can be

changed as required

by using the RE-

VOICE function, de-

scribed on page 78.

• The split point can be

changed as required

as described below.

• The SPLIT VOICE

mode can be used at

the same time as the

DUAL VOICE mode,

described above. In

this case the L voice

is played on the left-

hand section of the

keyboard while both

the R1 and R2 voices

are played on the

right-hand section of

the keyboard. See the

“The Dual Voice

Mode” section, above,

for more information.

Split Point (59)

The L TRACK button below the display can also be used to turn the L voice on or

off, only when a frame appears around the voice icons, or in the Song mode including

the Demo song playback.

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

TRACK

SPLIT

MINUS ONE

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

SPLIT

SPLIT VOICE

The SPLIT VOICE mode is engaged by pressing the [SPLIT VOICE] button.

When turned on, the L icon in the display will light in addition to the R1 or R1 and R2

icons. Press the [SPLIT VOICE] button a second time to disengage the SPLIT

VOICE mode: the L icon will go out leaving only the R voice.

21

Playing the PSR-530

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “S.Split” function from

within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number corresponding to the current

split point will appear to the left of “S.Split” on the top line of the display.

059

S.Split

2Set As Required

Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the

key you press will appear to the left of “S.Split” on the top line of the display. You can

also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the split point

key number. The lowest key on the keyboard (C1) is key number “36”, middle C (C3)

is “60”, and the highest key (C5) is 96. The split point can be set at any key number

from 0 through 127, allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR-530

keyboard for MIDI applications.

123

456

78

0

9

Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point

The SPLIT VOICE split point can be set to any key on the PSR-530 keyboard to

match your individual playing requirements.

1Select the SPLIT VOICE Split Point Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular

indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

• The split point key be-

comes the highest

key in the left-hand

section of the key-

board.

• The default split point

(59) can be instantly

recalled by pressing

the [–] and [+] buttons

at the same time.

• For the relationship

between the SPLIT

VOICE split point and

the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split

point, see page 30.

• When setting the split

point, that is, the sub

menu “S.Split” is

shown on the display,

pressing the key on

the keyboard doesn’t

either produce notes

or detect chords in the

accompaniment sec-

tion, but only desig-

nates the split point.

22

Auto Accompaniment

The PSR-530 has 100 different accompaniment “styles” that can be used to provide fully-

orchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. The PSR-530’s sophisticated AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT system can provide automated bass and chord backing that is perfectly matched

to the selected accompaniment style.

When Auto-Accompaniment is turned on, the specified left-hand section of the keyboard

becomes the “auto accompaniment” section, and chords played in this section are automati-

cally detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.

Using Auto Accompaniment

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION

1

MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

RHYTHM

1

LR2R1

001

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

8BtPop1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

DUAL

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

CHORUS DSP

1Select the Style Menu

Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu (the triangular indicator will

appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display). The number and name of the

currently selected style will appear on the top line of the display, and the accompani-

ment track and volume icons in the display will appear framed.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

split point (54)

“auto accompaniment”

section

23

STYLE

123

456

78

0

9

4

Set the Tempo

When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the

“default” tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed immediately

above “TEMPO” in the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If the accompani-

ment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style.

You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute,

however, by using the TEMPO [▼] and [▲] buttons. Press either button briefly to

decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous

decrementing or incrementing.

When either of the TEMPO buttons is pressed the current tempo value will appear

on the top line of the display for a few seconds — during this time the [–] and [+]

buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the tempo. The default

tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the TEMPO

[▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously (or by pressing the [–] and [+] buttons simulta-

neously while the tempo value is showing on the top line of the display).

TEMPO

REGISTRATION

1

MULTI PAD

120

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

Tempo

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

120

Auto Accompaniment

ON/

OFF

AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT

2Select a Style

The PSR-530 has 100 styles that can be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons,

the number buttons, the data dial, or the [STYLE] button (these controls function in

the same way as for voice selection — see page 17). The styles are listed in the STYLE

list printed at the top of the instrument’s control panel.

• See page 77 for de-

tails on selecting car-

tridge styles.

3Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT On

Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT [ON/OFF] so that its indicator lights.

• If AUTO ACCOMPA-

NIMENT is off, only

rhythm (drums and

percussion) accompa-

niment will be pro-

duced.

24

5Start the Accompaniment

There are several ways to start the accompaniment:

• It is possible to select the

MAIN A or B section prior to

a straight start — refer to

“7. Select the MAIN A and

B Sections as Required,”

below.

●Straight start

Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm will begin playing immediately

without bass and chord accompaniment. The currently selected MAIN [A] or

[B] section will play.

●Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN A section

Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [A] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press

[START/STOP].

●Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN B section

Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [B] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press

[START/STOP].

●Synchronized start

Any of the above start types can be synchronized to the first note or chord

played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. keys to the left of and

including the split-point key — normally 54) by first pressing the [SYNC

START] button.

• If you press the [SYNC

START] button while the

accompaniment is playing,

the accompaniment will

stop and the synchro start

mode will be engaged.

• The [INTRO] button can be

used to select the INTRO

section even while the ac-

companiment is playing.

• The accompaniment split

point can be changed via

the “Accompaniment Split

Point” function in the

OVERALL menu — see

page 29.

START/STOP

/

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

SYNC

STOP

SYNC

START

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

START/STOP

/

SYNC

STOP

SYNC

START

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

START/STOP

/

SYNC

STOP

SYNC

START

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

SYNC

STOP SYNC

START

Auto Accompaniment

25

Pressing the [SYNC START] button alone causes a straight start to occur

when the first note or chord is played. Press the [SYNC START] button and

then the appropriate [INTRO] and [MAIN/AUTO FILL] buttons for a

synchronized introduction start. The BEAT indicator will flash at the current

tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. The synchro start

mode can be disengaged prior to actually starting the accompaniment by

pressing the [SYNC START] button a second time.

Auto Accompaniment

• When the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split point and

SPLIT VOICE split point are

set at different keys, the L

voice can be played be-

tween the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split point and

SPLIT VOICE split point

when the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT function is on.

• When the AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT split point and

SPLIT VOICE split point are

set to the same key, the L

voice can be played any-

where to the left of the

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

split point and SPLIT

VOICE split point while

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

is not playing.

6Play On the Auto-accompaniment Section Of the Keyboard

●The Beat Indicator

The four dots of the BEAT indicator provide a visual indication of the selected

tempo as shown below.

• The PSR-530 has several

fingering modes which al-

low you to play chords in

different ways. See “The

Auto Accompaniment Fin-

gering Modes” on page 30

for details.

FINGERING

R

ATION MULTI PAD

mM

7

4/4 time 3/4 time

1st beat

2nd beat

3rd beat

4th beat

As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-530 can “recognize” on the left-

hand section of the keyboard, the PSR-530 will automatically begin to play the

chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The name of

the current chord will appear on the display. The accompaniment will continue

playing even if you release the keys (unless the Synchro Stop function is engaged

— page 26).

7Select the MAIN A and B Sections as Required

The MAIN A and MAIN B sections can be selected at any time during playback

by pressing the corresponding button. Whenever you press the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [A] or [B] button during playback, the PSR-530 will generate an appropriate

“fill-in” (one of four types: AA, AB, BA, and BB) which will smoothly connect

the current section to the selected section — even if it is the same section. For

example, if you press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button while the MAIN A

section is playing, a fill-in will be produced, then the MAIN A section will

continue playing. When you select a different section, the fill-in will begin

immediately and the new section will actually begin playing from the top of the

next measure unless the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or [B] button is pressed during

SYNC

STOP SYNC

START MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

• The MAIN A section is auto-

matically selected when-

ever the PSR-530 power is

initially turned on.

• The indicator of the destina-

tion section (MAIN A or B)

will flash while the corre-

sponding fill-in is playing.

During this time you can

change the destination sec-

tion by pressing the appro-

priate MAIN/AUTO FILL [A]

or [B] button.

26

the last half beat of the measure, in which case the fill-in will begin from the

first beat of the next measure.

Auto Accompaniment

8Stop the Accompaniment

The accompaniment can be stopped at any time by pressing the [START/

STOP] button. Press the [ENDING] button if you want to go to the ending

section and then stop.

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

SYNC

STOP SYNC

START

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

START/STOP

/

SYNC

STOP

SYNC

START

◆The Synchro Stop Function

When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback

will stop completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the

keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as

a chord is played. The BEAT indicators in the display will flash while the

accompaneiment is stopped.

The Synchro Stop function is engaged by pressing the [SYNC STOP]

button so that the SYNC STOP icon in the display appears. Press the [SYNC

STOP] button again so that the icon disappears to turn the Synchro Stop

function off.

FINGERING

E

GISTRATION MULTI PAD

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

SYNC

STOP

SYNC

STOP

• The Synchro Stop function

can not be turned on when

the FULL KEYBOARD AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT fingering

mode is selected. The Syn-

chro Stop function will be au-

tomatically turned off if the

FULL KEYBOARD fingering

mode is selected while the

Synchro Stop function is on.

• The ending will begin playing im-

mediately when you press the

[ENDING] button while the accom-

paniment is playing the first beat

of the measure.

The ending will begin playing from

the next measure when you press

the button while the accompani-

ment is playing the second or

larger numbered beat.

• If you press the [INTRO] button

while the ending is playing, the

intro section will begin playing af-

ter the ending is finished.

• Some INTRO and ENDING sec-

tions have their own chord pro-

gressions which play in the current

accompaniment key.

• If the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or [B]

button is pressed while the END-

ING section is playing, an appro-

priate fill-in will be played, followed

by a return to the MAIN A or B

section.

• The accompaniment volume can

be adjusted independently of the

keyboard volume via the ACCOM-

PANIMENT/SONG VOLUME [

▼

]

and [

▲

] buttons (page 28).

• Pressing the [ENDING] button dur-

ing the Ending playback deceler-

ate its tempo (ritardando).

27

Auto Accompaniment

Accompaniment Track Muting

The PSR-530 has eight accompaniment tracks — RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,

BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 — that you can

control to modify the “orchestration” and therefore the overall sound of the accom-

paniment. When a style is selected the icons corresponding to the tracks which contain

data for any section of that style will light.

• Individual track voic-

es, volume, and other

parameters can be

changed by using the

REVOICE function —

page 80.

● What’s in the Tracks

RHYTHM 1 & 2 These are the main rhythm tracks. The RHYTHM tracks produce the

drum and percussion sounds.

BASS The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the voice will change to

fit the selected style … acoustic bass, synth bass, tuba, etc.

CHORD 1 & 2 These tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accompaniment required by

each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instruments here.

PAD This track plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instru-

ments such as strings, organ, choir.

PHRASE 1 & 2 This is where the musical embellishments reside. The PHRASE tracks

are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras

that make the accompaniment more interesting.

Using Virtual Arranger

Simply pressing chords causes the Auto Accompaniment automatically plays the

slightly different chord variations and becomes livelier and more melodic when you

turn on the Virtual Arranger function while the Auto Accompaniment is active.

1Select the Style Menu

Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu (the triangular indicator will

appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display).

2Select the Virtual Arranger Function

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “VirtArng” function. The

current on/off status will be shown at the top left of the display.

Then use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Dial to select “on” or “off.”

STYLE

on

VirtArng

• Simultaneously press-

ing the [SYNC STOP]

and [SYNC START]

buttons causes the

Virtual Arranger to

switch between off

and on. The current

on/off status will be

shown at the top left

of the display. (The

on/off display will re-

turn to its original con-

dition after a few sec-

onds.)

28

Auto Accompaniment

Accompaniment Volume Control

When the STYLE menu is selected (i.e. the accompaniment track and volume icons

are framed) the volume of the accompaniment in relation to the keyboard can be

adjusted for the best overall balance by using the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG

VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons. When either button is pressed the current accompa-

niment volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds. The

accompaniment volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum volume).

The default setting is “100”. Press the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME [▼]

button to decrease the volume or the [▲] button to increase the volume. Pressing

briefly to single step, or hold for continuous decrementing/incrementing.

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION

1

MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

RHYTHM

1

LR2R1

100

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

AccVol

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

DUAL

ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

CHORUS DSP

While the accompaniment volume setting appears on the top line of the display the

[–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the

accompaniment volume.

■Muting Individual Tracks

Individual accompaniment tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by using the

TRACK buttons corresponding to the target tracks. The track icon will disappear

when a track is muted.

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

TRACK

DUAL

29

Auto Accompaniment

Changing the Accompaniment Split Point

The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point can be set to any key on the PSR-530

keyboard to match your individual playing requirements.

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

123

456

78

0

9

1

Select the Accompaniment Split Point Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular

indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “AccSpPnt” function

from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number corresponding to the

current split point will appear to the left of “AccSpPnt” on the top line of the display.

054

AccSpPnt

2Set As Required

Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the

key you press will appear to the left of “AccSpPnt” on the top line of the display. You

can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the split point

key number. The lowest key on the keyboard (C1) is key number “36”, middle C (C3)

is “60”, and the highest key (C5) is 96. The split point can be set at any key number

from 0 through 127, allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR-530

keyboard for MIDI applications.

• The split point key be-

comes the highest

key in the Auto Ac-

companiment section

of the keyboard.

• The default split point

(54) can be instantly

recalled by pressing

the [–] and [+] buttons

at the same time.

• When setting the split

point, that is, the sub

menu “AccSpPnt” is

shown on the display,

pressing the key on

the keyboard doesn’t

either produce notes

or detect chords in the

accompaniment sec-

tion, but only desig-

nates the split point.

30

Auto Accompaniment

◆Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and

SPLIT VOICE Split Points

The SPLIT VOICE split point (page 21) and AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point

can be independently specified, with the following limitations. The SPLIT VOICE

split point cannot be set at a lower key than the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point

(if you attempt to do this the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point will be set to the

same key as the SPLIT VOICE split point). Conversely, the AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT split point cannot be set at a higher key than the SPLIT VOICE split point (if

you attempt to do this the SPLIT VOICE split point will be set to the same key as the

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point).

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

split point SPLIT VOICE

split point

R Voice

L Voice

Accompaniment

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point/

SPLIT VOICE split point

R Voice

Accompaniment/

L Voice

The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes

The PSR-530 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature has five different fingering

modes which can be selected as follows.

1Select the Fingering Mode Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular

indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.

• You can jump directly

to the “FngrngMd”

function by pressing

and holding the AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT

[ON/OFF] button for a

few seconds.

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

31

Auto Accompaniment

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “FngrngMd” function

from within the OVERALL menu. The abbreviated name of the current fingering

mode will appear to the left of “FngrngMd” on the top line of the display.

2Select the Required Fingering Mode

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial to select the desired fingering mode:

●SF: The SINGLE FINGER Mode

SF Single Finger

F1 Fingered 1

F2 Fingered 2

FuL Full Keyboard

MuL Multi-finger

■For a major chord, press the root key only.

■For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a

black key to its left.

■For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a

white key to its left.

■For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key

and both a white and black key to its left.

Cm

7

C

7

Cm

C

Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated

accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by press-

ing a minimum number of keys on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the

keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used:

SF

FngrngMd

SF

FngrngMd

32

Auto Accompaniment

●F1: The FINGERED 1 Mode

The Fingered 1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the AUTO ACCOMPA-

NIMENT section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and including the split-

point key — normally 54) while the PSR-530 supplies appropriately orchestrated

rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style.

The FINGERED 1 mode recognizes the following chords:

F1

FngrngMd

• Notes in parentheses

can be omitted.

• If you play any three

adjacent keys (includ-

ing black keys), the

chord sound will be

cancelled and only

the rhythm instru-

ments will continue

playing (CHORD

CANCEL function).

• Playing a single key

or two same root keys

in the adjacent oc-

taves produces ac-

companiment based

only on the root.

• A perfect fifth (1 + 5)

produces accompani-

ment based only on

the root and fifth

which can be used

with both major and

minor chords.

• The chord fingerings

listed are all in “root”

position, but other in-

versions can be used

— with the following

exceptions:

m7, m7

b

5, 6, m6,

sus4, aug, dim7,

7

b

5, 6(9), m7(11),

1+2+5.

• Inversion of the 7sus4

chord are not recog-

nized if the 5th is

omitted.

• The AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT will some-

times not change

when related chords

are played in se-

quence (e.g. some

minor chords followed

by the minor seventh).

• Two-note fingerings

will produce a chord

based on the previ-

ously played chord.

Chord Name/[Abbreviation] Normal Voicing

Major [M] 1 - 3 - 5

Add ninth [(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - 5

Sixth [6] 1 - (3) - 5 - 6

Sixth ninth [6(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6

Major seventh [M7] 1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - 7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

Flatted fifth [(b5)] 1 - 3 - b5

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - 7

Suspended fourth [sus4] 1 - 4 - 5

Augmented [aug] 1 - 3 - #5

Major seventh augmented [M7aug] 1 - (3) - #5 - 7

Minor [m] 1 - b3 - 5

Minor add ninth [m(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - 5

Minor sixth [m6] 1 - b3 - 5 - 6

Minor seventh [m7] 1 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)] 1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)

Minor major seventh [mM7] 1 - b3 - (5) - 7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] 1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - b7

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5] 1 - b3 - b5 - 7

Diminished [dim] 1 - b3 - b5

Diminished seventh [dim7] 1 - b3 - b5 - 6

Seventh [7] 1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or

1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] 1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] 1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7

Seventh ninth [7(9)] 1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)] 1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or

1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)] 1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] 1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7

Seventh flatted fifth [7b5] 1 - 3 - b5 - b7

Seventh augmented [7aug] 1 - 3 - #5 - b7

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] 1 - 4 - (5) - b7

One plus two plus five [1+2+5] 1 - 2 - 5

Chord (C) Display

CC

C(9) C(9)

C6 C6

C6(9) C6(9)

CM7 CM7

CM7(9) CM7(9)

CM7(#11) CM7(#11)

C(b5) C(b5)

CM7b5 CM7b5

Csus4 Csus4

Caug Caug

CM7aug CM7aug

Cm Cm

Cm(9) Cm(9)

Cm6 Cm6

Cm7 Cm7

Cm7(9) Cm7(9)

Cm7(11) Cm7(11)

CmM7 CmM7

CmM7(9) CmM7(9)

Cm7b5 Cm7b5

CmM7b5 CmM7b5

Cdim Cdim

Cdim7 Cdim7

C7 C7

C7(b9) C7(b9)

C7(b13) C7(b13)

C7(9) C7(9)

C7(#11) C7(#11)

C7(13) C7(13)

C7(#9) C7(#9)

C7b5C7b5

C7aug C7aug

C7sus4 C7sus4

C1+2+5 C

33

Auto Accompaniment

C

Cm

7

C

( )

CM

( )

7

C(9) C

( )

(9)

6

Caug Cm6Cm7

( )

Cm b5

7CmM b5

7

Cm

( )

(9)

7

Cm(9)

CmM7

( )

CmM (9)

7

( )

Cdim Cdim7

C(9)

7

( )

C(13)

7

( )

C(b9)

7

( )

C(b13)

7

Csus4

C1+2+5

C b5

7

C6

( )

( )

CM7(9) 7

CM (#11)

( )

7

CM b5

C(b5)

( )

C(#11)

7C(#9)

7

( )

C aug

7

Cm7(11)

( )

( )

CM aug

7

( )

C sus4

7

( )

●F2: The FINGERED 2 Mode

This is essentially the same as the FINGERED 1 mode, described above, except

that the FINGERED 2 mode additionally allows you to specify the lowest note of

each chord — simply, the lowest note played in the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

section of the keyboard is used as the accompaniment bass note. This means you

can specify “on-bass” chords in which the main bass note for the chord is not the

root of the chord. For a C major chord, for example, you could use E (the third) or

G (the fifth) as the bass note rather than C.

F2

FngrngMd

CC on E C on G

Example for “C” chords

FuL

FngrngMd

●FuL: The FULL KEYBOARD Mode

When the FULL KEYBOARD mode is selected, the PSR-530 will automatically

create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything using both

hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You do not have to worry about specifying the

accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will appear in the display.

• When the FULL KEY-

BOARD mode is se-

lected, the split point

setting (see page 29)

for the auto accompa-

niment will be ig-

nored.

• Chord detection oc-

curs at approximately

8th-note intervals. Ex-

tremely short chords

— less than an 8th

note in length — may

not be detected.

34

Auto Accompaniment

◆The Stop Accompaniment Function

While the SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2, or MULTI-FIN-

GER mode is selected chords played in the AUTO ACCOMPNIMENT section of

the keyboard are also detected and played by the PSR-530 Auto Accompaniment

system when the accompaniment is stopped (except when the FULL KEYBOARD

mode is engaged). In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected

automatically.

One Touch Setting

The PSR-530’s 100 internal styles each have four recommended “panel setups”

that can be instantly selected via the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] and REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY [1] … [4] buttons. The One Touch Setting feature automatically

sets the following parameters:

● One Touch Setting Parameter List

• R1 Voice

(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb level,

chorus send level, DSP send level)

• Dual Voice ON/OFF

• R2 Voice

(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb level,

chorus send level, DSP send level)

• Split Voice ON/OFF

• L Voice

(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb level,

chorus send level, DSP send level)

• Split Point : Split Voice=59

: Auto Accompaniment=54

• Auto Accompaniment=ON

• When the AUTO AC-

COMPANIMENT split

point and SPLIT

VOICE split point are

set to the same key,

the L voice and the

automatically selected

bass note will sound.

●MuL: The MULTI-FINGER Mode

This is the default accompaniment mode. The MULTI-FINGER mode automati-

cally detects SINGLE FINGER or FINGERED 1 chord fingerings, so you can

use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes.

muL

FngrngMd

• Main A/B section

• Accompaniment Track data

(Style parameters=default, Track ON/OFF)

• Synchro start=ON

• Accompaniment volume=100

• Harmony ON/OFF, type, volume

• Reverb ON/OFF

• Chorus ON/OFF

• DSP ON/OFF, type, variation ON/OFF

• Multi Pad Set number

• Chord Match ON/OFF=Default (Multi Pad1…4)

• If you want to play mi-

nor, seventh or minor

seventh chords using

the SINGLE FINGER

operation in the MULTI-

FINGER Mode, always

press the closest white/

black key(s) to the root

of the chord.

35

Auto Accompaniment

1Select a Style

Select the STYLE menu and select an accompaniment style as described on page

22.

2Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] Button

Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. The ONE TOUCH SETTING and

REGIST [1] icons will appear in the display, and the ONE TOUCH SETTING type 1

panel settings will be recalled. At the same, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will

automatically be turned on if it was off, and the SYNC START mode will be engaged.

4Turn ONE TOUCH SETTING Off When Done

Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button so that the ONE TOUCH SETTING

icon in the display disappears to turn the ONE TOUCH SETTING feature off.

REGISTRATION

1234

MULTI PAD

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1

MEASURE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

4321

REGISTRATION

1234

MULTI PAD

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1

MEASURE

• “No OTS” will appear

on the display if an

optional cartridge

style which has no

ONE TOUCH SET-

TING data is selected.

3Select a ONE TOUCH SETTING Type, as Required

If you want to select a different REGISTRATION MEMORY, use the REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY buttons to select the desired ONE TOUCH SETTING type. The

corresponding number will appear in the display, and all setting will change according

to the recalled data.

36

Digital Effects

Reverb

The REVERB effect applies only to the R1. Reverb can be turned completely off

by selecting the “off” reverb type as described below.

Turning the Reverb Effect On or Off

Press the [REVERB] button so that the REVERB icon appears in the display to turn

the selected REVERB effect on. Press [REVERB] a second time so that the REVERB

icon disappears to turn the REVERB effect off.

• The REVERB effect

will be turned on or off

according to the se-

lected R1 panel voice.

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

HARMONY TEMPO

116

REVERB

The PSR-530 has 12 digital reverb effects that simulate the natural reverberation of

a range of acoustic environments. See “The Digital Effect List” on page 108. There’s

also an “Off” setting:

With the digital effects built into the PSR-530 you can add ambiance and depth to your music

in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a

concert hall or adding harmony notes for a full, rich sound.

Digital Effects

REVERB Button You can create a reverb effect that makes you sound like you

are playing in places like a concert hall, or live in a club.

CHORUS Button You can add a chorus effect that makes your playing sound

as though multiple parts were being played together at the

same time.

DSP Button In addition to the reverb and chorus types, the effects usually

used to a specific part, such as the distortion and tremolo,

can be selected.

HARMONY Button You can add a variety of harmony notes to the R1 voice, or

to your playing in the right-hand section, as well as adding

an tremolo or other effect.

• For details about using Digital Effects (Reverb, Chorus, DSP) see page 106.

REVERB

CHORUS

DSP

HARMONY

37

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reverb”. After a few

seconds the name of the currently selected REVERB type will appear on top line

of the display.

Reverb

Hall 1

01

Digital Effects

Selecting a Reverb Type

1Select the Digital Effect “Reverb” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

• You can also jump directly to

the DIGITAL EFFECT RE-

VERB TYPE function by

pressing and holding the

[REVERB] button for a few

seconds.

2Select a Reverb Effect

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired

REVERB effect (the name of the selected REVERB effect will appear on the top

line of the display). Select “OFF” if you want no REVERB effect on any part of

the PSR-530 sound.

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

• When you select a different

Style, the appropriate Re-

verb type will be selected

accordingly. Some of the

Styles contain Reverb types

which cannot be selected on

the PSR-530. In this case “ –

:XG Rev.” will be displayed

when you select the SUB

MENU Reverb of the DIGI-

TAL EFFECT.

• If you don’t want to apply the

Reverb effect to Styles or

Songs, select “13: OFF”

from the Reverb types, or

set the Reverb Return Level

to its minimum. In this case

no Reverb is applied to the

entire system. If you use the

Revoice function, you can

set the Reverb Send Level

for each track of the Style/

User Song independently

(see page 78).

38

Digital Effects

Chorus

The PSR-530’s 9 chorus effects can be used to give your sound extra life and

animation. See “The Digital Effect List” on page 108.

The CHORUS effect applies only to the R1. Chorus can be turned completely off

by selecting the “Off” chorus type as described below.

HARMONY TEMPO

116

CHORUS DSP

CHORUS

Turning the Chorus Effect On or Off

Press the [CHORUS] button so that the CHORUS icon appears in the display to turn

the selected chorus effect on. Press [CHORUS] a second time so that the CHORUS

icon disappears to turn the CHORUS effect off.

• The CHORUS effect

will be turned on or off

according to the se-

lected R1 panel voice.

064

RevRtnLv

Reverb Return Level

The RevRtnLv (Reverb Return Level) parameter sets the amount of reverb effect

returned from the reverb effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of

reverb effect applied to the overall sound.

1Select the Digital Effect “RevRtnLv” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select

“RevRtnLvl”.

2Set the Reverb Return Level

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the desired reverb

return level (the current return level value appears to the left of “RevRtnLv” on the

display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return

level.

39

Digital Effects

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

Chorus

Flanger1

06

Selecting a Chorus Effect

1Select the Digital Effect “Chorus” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

2Select a Chorus Effect

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired

chorus effect (the name of the selected chorus effect will appear on the top line

of the display). Select “Off” if you want no chorus effect on any part of the PSR-

530 sound.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Chorus”. After a few

seconds the name of the currently selected chorus effect will appear on the top

line of the display.

• When you select a different

Style, the appropriate Cho-

rus type will be selected ac-

cordingly. Some of the

Styles contain Chorus types

which cannot be selected on

the PSR-530. In this case “ –

:XG Cho.” will be displayed

when you select the SUB

MENU Chorus of the DIGI-

TAL EFFECT.

• If you don’t want to apply the

Chorus effect to Styles or

Songs, select “10: OFF”

from the Chorus types, or

set the Chorus Return Level

to its minimum. In this case

no Chorus is applied to the

entire system. If you use the

Revoice function, you can

set the Chorus Send Level

for each track of the Style/

User Song independently

(see page 78).

Chorus Return Level

The ChoRtnLv (Chorus Return Level) parameter sets the amount of chorus

effect returned from the chorus effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the

degree of chorus effect applied to the overall sound.

1Select the Digital Effect “ChoRtnLv” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the

display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]

buttons to select “ChoRtnLvl”.

ChoRtnLv

064

• You can also jump directly to

the DIGITAL EFFECT Cho-

rus function by pressing and

holding the [CHORUS] but-

ton for a few seconds.

40

Digital Effects

DSP

RETURNSEND

The PSR-530 features an extensive range of 45 DSP (Digital Signal Processor)

effects. There are two types of digital effects, system effects and insertion effects. The

illustration below will give you an idea of how DSP effects work, centering on the

mixer. See “The Digital Effect List” on page 108.

●System Effect:

Applies to all of the parts input to the mixer. You can set the Effect Send Level and

Effect Return Level. The System Effect includes Reverb and Chorus types.

●Insertion Effect:

Applies only to a designated part before inputting the signal to the mixer. You can

effectively use the digital effects by applying the effect to the specific part. With

the Insertion Effect, you can only designate the Effect Send Level. The Insertion

Effect includes Distortion and Tremolo.

Insertion Effect

System Effect

Amp

Mixer

Speaker

2Set the Chorus Return Level

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the desired chorus

return level (the current return level value appears to the left of “ChoRtnLv” on the

display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return

level.

• DSP send level can-

not be modified for

some Insertion ef-

fects. In this case the

display shows “- - -”,

indicating that it’s not

accessible.

41

Digital Effects

The DSP effect applies to the R1, R2 and L. The DSP effect can be turned

completely off by selecting the “Off” DSP type as described below.

HARMONY TEMPO

116

CHORUS DSP

DSP

Turning the DSP Effect On or Off

Press the [DSP] button so that the DSP icon appears in the display to turn the

selected DSP effect on. Press [DSP] a second time so that the DSP icon disappears to

turn the DSP effect off.

• The DSP effect and

variation settings may

change according to

the selected R1 panel

voice.

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

Selecting a DSP Effect

1Select the Digital Effect “DSP” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

• You can also jump di-

rectly to the DIGITAL

EFFECT DSP func-

tion by pressing and

holding the [DSP] but-

ton for a few seconds.

2Select a DSP Effect

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired DSP

effect (the name of the selected DSP effect will appear on the top line of the display).

Select “Off” if you want no DSP effect on any part of the PSR-530 sound.

Each DSP effect has its own variation. Turn the [DSP VARIATION] button ON to

activate each variation.

DSP

Hall 1

01

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “DSP”. After a few seconds

the name of the currently selected DSP effect will appear on the top line of the display.

HARMONY TEMPO

116

CHORUS DSP

VARIATION

42

Digital Effects

Harmony

When HARMONY is on, playing single notes or chords on the right-hand section

of the keyboard produces automatic harmony matched to the accompaniment chords

(AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT must be on). Harmony is applied to the R1 voice. When

chords are played the harmony is based on the last note played (i.e. last-note priority).

The PSR-530 has 16 different harmony types, as listed below.

2Set the DSP Return Level

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the desired DSP

return level (the current return level value appears to the left of “DspRtnLv” on the

display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return

level.

DspRtnLv

064

No. Type Description

1 Duet This harmony type produces a duophonic melody with the second voice below the melody

line.

2 Trio This harmony type generates two voices in addition to the melody voice.

3 4 Part Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four-note chord.

4 4 Part Jazz Similar to the preceding type, but depending on the chords played this type will

sometimes produce a more colorful sound.

5 Country Similar to Duet, but the second voice is above the melody line.

6 Octave One note is added an octave below the melody.

7 Tremolo The note(s) pressed and held is(are) repeatedly played at the preset tempo.

8 Tremolo Duet Combination of Tremolo and Duet; produces a duophonic melody with two voices played

alternately.

DSP Return Level

The DspRtnLv (DSP Return Level) parameter sets the amount of DSP effect

returned from the DSP effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of DSP

effect applied to the overall sound.

1Select the Digital Effect “DspRtnLv” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select

“DspRtnLv”.

43

Digital Effects

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

HARMONY TEMPO

116

HARMONY

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

Selecting a Harmony Type

1Select the Digital Effect “Harmony” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.

No. Type Description

9 Tremolo Octave Combination of Tremolo and Octave; produces a duophonic melody with two voices

played alternately (the second voice is an octave below the melody).

10 Strumming This type adds arpeggiated pattern to the melody.

11 Trio Delay Two notes slightly below the melody are added to create three parts. Additional notes are

delayed slightly.

12 Vibraphone &

Two voices, Vibraphone and Jazz Guitar, below the melody are added to create three parts.

Jazz Guitar

13 Trumpet & Sax Two voices, Trumpet and Saxophone, below the melody are added to create three parts.

14 Back Vocal “Vocal” voice is added to the melody to get a vocal part in the background.

15 Strings “Strings” voice is added to the melody to create an orchestral atmosphere.

16 Forest “Twitterings” of a bird are added to the melody to create an effect as if you were playing

outside.

• The Harmonies except for the types 6,7 and 9

are applied to the R1 voice according to the

chords detected in the Accompaniment sec-

tion.

Turning the Harmony Effect On or Off

Press the [HARMONY] button so that the HARMONY icon appears in the display

to turn the selected HARMONY effect on. Press [HARMONY] a second time so that

the HARMONY icon disappears to turn the HARMONY effect off.

• HARMONY can not

be turned on when a

drum kit is selected

for the R1 voice.

• HARMONY can not

be turned on when

the FULL KEYBOARD

AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT fingering mode

is selected even if

AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT is on. HAR-

MONY will be auto-

matically turned off if

the FULL KEYBOARD

fingering mode is se-

lected while the HAR-

MONY effect is on.

• When the Voice Set

function is ON (Page

85), the HARMONY

effect settings may

change according to

the selected R1 panel

voice.

44

Digital Effects

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Harmony”. After a few

seconds the name of the currently selected HARMONY type will appear on top line

of the display.

• You can also jump di-

rectly to the DIGITAL

EFFECT HARMONY

TYPE function by

pressing and holding

the [HARMONY] but-

ton for a few seconds.

Harmony

Duet

01

2Select a Harmony Type

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired

HARMONY type (the name of the selected HARMONY type will appear on the top

line of the display).

Adjusting the Harmony Volume

The volume of the harmony sound in relation to the keyboard sound can be adjusted

for HARMONY types 1 through 10 as follows (HARMONY types 11 through 22 are

not affected):

1Select the Digital Effect “HarmVol” Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display

next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select

“HarmVol”. The current harmony volume setting will appear to the left of “HarmVol”

on the display.

100

HarmVol

2Adjust the Harmony Volume

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to adjust the harmony

volume as required. The range is from “0” to “127” — “0” is minimum (no sound) and

“127” is maximum volume.

• When the Voice Set

function is ON (page

85), the Harmony Vol-

ume may change ac-

cording to the se-

lected R1 panel voice.

45

Use the PSR-530 pitch bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down

(roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The pitch bend wheel is self-centering

and will automatically return to nornal pitch when released.

The maximum pitch bend range can be set via the PITCH BEND RANGE function

in the OVERALL function group. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the

triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.

The Pitch Bend Wheel

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “PBRange”. The current

pitch bend range setting will appear to the left of the function name on the top line of

the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the pitch

bend range from “01” to “12” as required. Each increment corresponds to one

semitone.

02

PBRange

A setting of “02”, for example, will result in a maximum pitch bend range of plus

and minus a whole note.

• When the Voice Set

function is ON (page

85), the Pitch Bend

Range will be

changed according to

the selected R1 panel

voice.

• The default pitch bend

range can be instantly

recalled by pressing

the [+] and [–] buttons

simultaneously.

Setting the Pitch Bend Range

46

Transpose

This functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-530 to be transposed up or down by a

maximum of one octave in semitone increments.

Setting Transposition

Use the TRANSPOSE [▼] and [▲] buttons to set the desired degree of transposi-

tion. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment by one, or hold for

continuous decrementing or incrementing. The current transpose value will appear on

the top line of the display for a few seconds whenever one of the TRANSPOSE buttons

is pressed — during this time the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can

also be used to set the transpose value (the transpose value also appears continuously

above “TRANSPOSE” in the display).

• Press the TRANS-

POSE [

▼

] and [

▲

]

buttons simulta-

neously to instantly

reset the transpose

value to “0”.

• The new TRANS-

POSE value will take

effect from the next

key played.

The transpose range is from –12 to +12. Each step corresponds to one semitone,

allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of 1-octave. A setting of “0”

produces the normal pitch.

-02

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

Transpos

REVERB TRANSPOSE

2-

REPEAT

TRANSPOSE

47

Registration Memory

The PSR-530 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 128 complete control-

panel setups (32 banks, 4 setups each) that you can recall whenever needed.

1Set Up the Controls as Required

Make the desired control settings. The following settings are memorized by the

Registration Memory function:

Registering the Panel Settings

VOICE PARAMETERS

• Split Point (Split Voice)

• Touch Sensitivity

• Reverb ON/OFF

• Chorus ON/OFF

• DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/

OFF

• DSP type

• Harmony ON/OFF, type,

volume

• Pitch bend range

• Scale Tuning

● Data Stored By the Registration Memory

ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS

• R1 Voice (Voice number,

volume, octave, pan, reverb

send level, chorus send level,

DSP send level)

• Dual Voice ON/OFF

• R2 Voice (Voice number,

volume, octave, pan, reverb

send level, chorus send level,

DSP send level)

• Split Voice ON/OFF

• L Voice (Voice number,

volume, octave, pan, reverb

send level, chorus send level,

DSP send level)

01

Bank 1

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

• Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF

• Style number

• Fingering mode

• Tempo

• Split point

(Auto Accompaniment)

• Accompaniment volume

• Track data (Track ON/OFF, voice, volume,

pan, reverb send level, chorus send level)

• Accompaniment section (Main A/B)

• Multi Pad Set number

• Chord Match ON/OFF (Multi Pad1…4)

• Transpose

• Reverb type

• Chorus type

• Press and hold the

REGISTRATION

MEMORY [MEMORY]

button for a few sec-

onds to go directly to

the REGISTRATION

BANK display.

2Select a Registration Bank (if necessary)

Any of the eight Registration Memory banks can be selected via the REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY menu. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular

indicator next to “REGISTRATION MEMORY “ in the menu list to the left of the

display — the currently selected registration bank number and name will appear on

the top line of the display. Then use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data

dial to select the desired bank (1 through 32).

48

Registration Memory

3Register the Settings

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the REGISTRATION

MEMORY buttons — [1] through [4]. Any data that was previously in the selected

location is erased and replaced by the new settings. The corresponding REGISTRA-

TION MEMORY number will appear below “REGISTRATION” in the display.

Recall the Registered Panel Settings

Simply select the appropriate bank as described above, then press the desired

REGISTRATION MEMORY button at any time to recall the memorized settings. The

corresponding Registration Memory number will appear below “REGISTRATION”

in the display, and the appropriate setting changes will appear in the display.

• REGISTRATION

MEMORY data can-

not be recalled when

the ONE TOUCH

SETTING feature is

on.

• No REGISTRATION

MEMORY indicator

will be showing when

the PSR-530 is ini-

tially turned on or

when a bank is se-

lected prior to actually

selecting a REGIS-

TRATION MEMORY

number.

The Accompaniment Freeze Function

When the FREEZE function is engaged, the accompaniment parameters listed

above will not be changed when a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled. This

allows you to recall different REGISTRATION MEMORY settings while using Auto

Accompaniment, without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompaniment. The

FREEZE function is turned on and off by pressing the [FREEZE] button. The

“FREEZE” icon appears in the display when it is turned on.

• FREEZE remains on

even if a different reg-

istration bank is se-

lected.

• The Freeze function

will automatically be

turned on when one

of the following

modes, Song, Record

or Style Revoice, is

engaged.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

4321

REGISTRATION

1234

MULTI PAD

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

REGISTRATION MEMORY

4321

REGISTRATION

1234

MULTI PAD

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

G

ISTRATION MEMORY

43

FREEZE

REGISTRATION

1234

MULTI PAD

FREEZE

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

• The REGISTRATION

MEMORY contents

will be retained even

after turning the

power off. See page

98 for the details.

49

The Multi Pads

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set

The PSR-530 has 36 multi pad sets, each containing a complete set of 4 MULTI

PAD phrases — 144 phrases in all. Before using the MULTI PADS, select the MULTI

PAD set containing the phrases you want to use as follows:

1Select the Multi Pad Function

To select a multi pad set first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the

MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to

“MULTI PAD” to the left of the display.

2Select a Multi Pad Set Number

If necessary use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that the name of the

currently selected MULTI PAD set appears on the display (see list on page 50), then

use the [–] and [+], number buttons, or data dial to select the MULTI PAD set you want

to use.

• Press and hold the

MULTI PAD [STOP]

button for a few sec-

onds to go directly to

the MULTI PAD SET

display.

The PSR-530 MULTI PADS can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and

melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard perfor-

mances. You can also record your own MULTI PAD phrases as described in “MULTI PAD

Recording” on page 71.

Some pad phrases simply play back as programmed, while others are “chord match” types

which, if the CHORD MATCH function is turned on, are automatically transposed to match

chords played using the PSR-530 Auto Accompaniment feature.

01

Fanfare1

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

MULTI PAD

50

The Multi Pads

Playing the MULTI PADs

Simply tap any of the MULTI PADs at any time to play back the corresponding

phrase at the currently set tempo. MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button

is pressed. You can even play two, three, or four MULTI PADs at the same time. Also,

you can create “retriggered sample” effects by repeatedly pressing a pad before its

contents are completely played back.

The MULTI PAD voices are indepedent from the voices you have currently selected

for keyboard performance. You could, for example, play piano on the keyboard while

a MULTI PAD plays a brass chord stab.

When the CHORD MATCH function (see page 51) for a pad is turned on, the

corresponding phrase will be automatically transposed to match chords played using

the PSR-530 Auto-accompaniment feature.

MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP]

button.

STOP

21

MUTLI PAD

43

1234

MULTI PAD

1

MEASURE

STOP

21

MUTLI PAD

43

● The Multi Pad Sets

Chord Match

Set Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4

1 Fanfare1 OOO—

2 Fanfare2 OOO—

3 Brassy1 OOOO

4 Brassy2 OOOO

5 Synth Brass OOOO

6 Guitar Play1 OOOO

7 Guitar Play2 OOOO

8 Guitar Play3 OOOO

9 Guitar Play4 OOOO

10 Techno Synth1 OOOO

11 Techno Synth2 OOOO

12 Arpeggio OOOO

13 Crystal OOOO

14 Twinkle OOOO

15 Magical OOOO

16 Piano Sequence OOOO

17 Banjo Sequence OOOO

18 Gothic OOOO

Chord Match

Set Pad 1 Pad 2 Pad 3 Pad 4

19 Classic OOOO

20 Jingle OOOO

21 Horror SE ————

22 Racing SE ————

23 Stormy SE ————

24 Water SE ————

25 Dog SE ————

26 Haha SE ————

27Rock Kit ————

28 Techno Kit ————

29 Analog Kit ————

30 Tom Flam ————

31 Latin Percusion1 ————

32 Latin Percussion2 ————

33 Timbales ————

34 Analog Sequence ————

35 Conga Sequence ————

36 Techno Sequence ————

51

The Multi Pads

Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off

• The chord match

function has no effect

with pads that contain

percussion phrases.

2Select a CHORD MATCH Function

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Pad1Chd”, “Pad2Chd”,

“Pad3Chd”, or “Pad4Chd”, depending on the pad for which you want to turn the

CHORD MATCH function on or off.

3Turn the CHORD MATCH Function On or Off

Use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial to turn the CHORD MATCH function for

the selected pad “on” or “off” as required.

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

MULTI PAD

on

Pad1Chd

• The CHORD MATCH

ON/OFF setting is re-

stored to its original

status whenever a

preset MULTI PAD

set is selected.

• When the CHORD

MATCH ON/OFF sta-

tus of a user MULTI

PAD (see page 71)

set is changed, the

new status is re-

corded with the

MULTI PAD data.

456

78

0

9

NO YES

123

• The chord match on/

off status depends on

the selected Multi

Pad.

The CHORD MATCH function can be individually turned on or off for each of the

MULTI PADs, as described below.

1Select the MULTI PAD Function

Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the

triangular indicator in the display appears next to “MULTI PAD” to the left of the

display.

52

Song Playback

Use the following procedure to play back the PSR-530’s internal demonstration songs as well

as songs you record yourself (see “Song Recording”, page 58).

1Select the Song Menu

Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will

appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). The number and name of the

currently selected song will appear on the top line of the display, and the song track

and volume icons near the bottom of the display will appear framed.

Song Playback Procedure

2Select a SONG Number

If necessary, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to select

the SONG number you want to play. The SONG number can also be incremented by

pressing the [SONG] button: press briefly to increment by one, or hold for continuous

incrementing.

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

01

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

PeterGun

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

CHORUS DSP

02

R&B

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

53

3Start Playback

Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. You can turn

the MELODY and ACCOMPANIMENT tracks on and off during playback as required

by using the TRACK buttons.

• You can also start

playback from any

specified measure

(see page 54).

START/STOP

/

Song Playback

4Play Along If You Like

Play along on the keyboard if you like. You can also change the tempo during

playback.

5Stop Playback

SONG playback will stop automatically when the entire SONG has been played

back. You can also stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Song Volume Control

When the SONG menu is selected (i.e. the song track and volume icons near the

bottom of the display are framed) the volume of SONG playback in relation to the

keyboard can be adjusted for the best overall balance by using the ACCOMPANI-

MENT/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons. When either button is pressed the

current song volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds.

The song volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum volume). The

default setting is “100”. Press the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME [▼] button

to decrease the volume or the [▲] button to increase the volume. Pressing briefly to

single step, or hold for continuous decrementing/incrementing.

While the song volume setting appears on the top line of the display the [–] and [+]

buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the song volume.

ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

100

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

SongVol

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

CHORUS DSP

54

Song Playback

Play from a Specified Measure

You can start SONG playback from any specified measure, as long as the specified

measure is within the range of measures that has already been recorded:

1Select the Measure Parameter

While the SONG menu is selected, but no playback or recording is in progress, use

the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Measure” parameter in the display.

The current measure number will appear to the left of “Measure” on the top line of the

display (the current measure number is also continuously displayed next to “MEA-

SURE” in the display).

2Enter the Desired Measure Number

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the desired measure

number.

3Start Playback

You can now start playback from the specified measure number by pressing the

[START/STOP] button.

001

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

Measure

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

START/STOP

/

009

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

Measure

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

9

MEASURE

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

• You can move the

measure number for

playback back and

forth even during the

song playback.

55

Song Playback

Minus-one Practice

Minus-one playback lets you turn off specific parts of a song so you can practice

them on the PSR-530 keyboard while the other parts play automatically. Any of the

PSR-530’s four MELODY tracks and/or the ACCOMPANIMENT track can be turned

on or off as required. Individual SONG tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by

using the TRACK buttons corresponding to the target MELODY or ACCOMPANI-

MENT tracks. The track icon will disappear when a track is muted.

Minus-one Track Assignment

Many of the PSR-530 demonstration songs, and songs provided on Music Car-

tridges (see “Using Music Cartridges”, page 75) have more than 4 channels — as many

as 16, in fact. This function lets you assign any of the song’s channels to the PSR-530’s

MELODY tracks so they can be turned on or off for minus-one practice.

1Select the MinusOne Parameter

While the SONG menu is selected, but no recording is in progress, use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “MinusOne” parameter in the display. After

a few seconds “MinusOne” will change to “MinusCh”, the number of the current

minus-one channel will appear to the left of “MinusCh”, and a frame will appear

around the MELODY 1 song track icon.

MINUS ONE SPLIT DUAL

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

11

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

MinusOne

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

01

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

MinusCh

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

CHORUS DSP CHORUS DSP

56

Song Playback

2Select a MELODY Track

Use the TRACK buttons to select the song MELODY track (1…4) to which a

minus-one channel is to be assigned. A frame will appear around the selected track

icon.

MINUS ONE

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

3Assign a Channel to the Selected Track

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttoms, or data dial to assign the desired

minus-one channel (1…16) to the selected MELODY track. The number of the

assigned channel will appear to the left of “MinusCh” on the top line of the display.

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

05

MinusCh

• Press the [–] and [+]

buttons simulta-

neously to recall the

song’s initial channel

assignment for the se-

lected track.

• Minus-one channel

assignments do not

apply to songs you

record yourself.

• If a selected song in-

cludes minus-one

channel settings,

those channels will

automatically be as-

signed to the appro-

priate tracks.

57

Song Playback

Repeat Play

This function allows you to specify any section of a song — internal or cartridge —

for continuous repeat playback.

1Select the A-b Repeat Parameter

While the SONG menu is selected, but no recording is in progress, use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “A-b Repeat” parameter in the display. The

MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] and [B] button indicators will flash.

2Start Playback

Press the [START/STOP] button to start song playback.

3Specify the Repeat “A” and “B” Points

While the song is playing, press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button at the beginning

of the section to be repeated (the [A] button indicator will light continuously, and the

“A” repeat icon will appear in the display), then press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [B]

button at the end of the section to be repeated (the [B] button indicator will light

continuously, and the “B” repeat icon will appear in the display). Repeat playback will

begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified, and

will continue until either the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button is pressed again to cancel

the repeat function, or until song playback is stopped.

• If only the “A” repeat

point is specified, re-

peat playback will oc-

cur between the “A”

point and the end of

the song.

• If the MAIN/AUTO

FILL [B] button is

pressed during repeat

playback, the previ-

ously specified “B”

point will be cancelled

and a new “B” point

can be specified as

required.

• Repeat playback will

continue even if a dif-

ferent menu is se-

lected during repeat

playback.

• Repeat playback will

be cancelled if a dif-

ferent SONG number

selected or the record

mode is engaged or

the revoice mode is

engaged.

A-b

Repeat

AB

START/STOP

/

MAIN/AUTO FILL

AB

FREEZE

AB

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1

MEASURE

MAIN/AUTO FILL

AB

FREEZE

AB

REPEAT

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

1

MEASURE

58

Song Recording

The PSR-530 SONG tracks allows you to record and play back complete songs including

chord sequences created using the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature and a melody lines

you play on the keyboard. The SONG tracks include one ACCOMPANIMENT track and four

MELODY tracks.

The PSR-530 can retain up to 4 complete songs in internal memory, and these can be

selected and played back as described in the preceding section.

• Material recorded on the SONG tracks will be retained even after turning the power

off. See page 98 for the details.

• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,

or the batteries fail during recording.

• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

●The SONG MELODY tracks record the following operations and

data:

• Up to approximately

4500 notes can be re-

corded in the PSR-

530 MELODY tracks.

• Only harmony applied

to the last track re-

corded will be in-

cluded in the recorded

song data (see page

42 for details on the

HARMONY effect).

●The SONG ACCOMPANIMENT track records the following opera-

tions and data:

• Note on/off.

• Velocity.

• R1 and R2 voice number, volume,

octave, pan, reverb send level,

chorus send level, DSP send level.

• Dual voice on/off.

• Reverb on/off.

• Reverb type.

• Chorus on/off.

• Chorus type.

• DSP on/off, variation on/off.

• Harmony on/off, type.**

• Sustain pedal on/off.

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range.

• Section changes.

• Style number.*

• Accompaniment track changes*

(8 tracks: track on/off, voice

number, volume, pan, reverb send

level, chorus send level, DSP send

level).

• Accompaniment volume.*

• Chord changes, timing.

• Reverb type.

• Chorus type.

• Tempo and time signature

(common to the ACCOMPANI-

MENT and MELODY tracks).*

*Recorded only at the beginning of a song; changes cannot be made during recording.

** Recorded only at the beginning of a song; changes cannot be made during recording. Only one

melody track can be recorded with harmony. The harmony data for the last track recorded with

harmony will be retained (last priority).

• Up to approximately

3500 chords can be

recorded in the AC-

COMPANIMENT

track, when the Virtual

Arranger is OFF.

59

Song Recording

1Set Up to Record

Before recording set up the PSR-530 as required: e.g. select the required

voice(s), effects, accompaniment style, accompaniment fingering mode, etc.

Song Recording Procedure

3Select the SONG Record Mode

Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG record mode. The SONG menu

will automatically be selected and a SONG number will appear on the top line of

the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating

that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged. Also, the frame surrounding

the song MELODY and ACCOMPANIMENT track icons will flash, indicating that

a MELODY and/or ACCOMPANIMENT track must be selected before recording

can begin.

• If the [RECORD] button is

pressed while a demon-

stration song or cartridge

song is selected, the low-

est-numbered user song

which does not contain

any recorded data will au-

tomatically be selected. If

other user songs already

contain data, however,

user song number 13 will

be selected.

• The following panel set-

ting changes will occur

when the record ready

mode is engaged:

• The measure number will

be reset to “1”.

• If the Metronome function

is on (page 85), the metro-

nome will sound at the cur-

rent tempo.

• The REGISTRATION

MEMORY FREEZE func-

tion will be turned on (it

cannot be turned off while

the record mode is en-

gaged).

• The SYNCHRO STOP

function wil be turned off.

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

13

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

UserSng1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

CHORUS DSP

2Engage the Record Ready Mode

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]

button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]

icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record

modes.

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

13

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

UserSng1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

CHORUS DSP

1234

60

4If Necessary, Select a User Song Number

If the desired user song is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, number

buttons, or data dial to select as required.

Song Recording

5Select the Track(s) to be Recorded

Use the TRACK buttons to select a SONG MELODY track to record (only one

MELODY track can be recorded at a time). A frame appears continuously around the

icon of the MELODY track selected for recording.

• The R1 and R2 voices

can be simultaneously

recorded on a single

track. The L voice can-

not be recorded.

• If you start recording

without selecting a spe-

cific track while the

panel AUTO ACCOM-

PANIMENT button is on,

the MELODY 1 and

ACCOMP tracks will au-

tomatically be selected

for recording.

The ACCOMPANIMENT track can be recorded alone or at the same time as one

MELODY track. If you intend to record accompaniment use the appropriate

TRACK button to select the ACCOMPANIMENT track (a frame will appear

continuously around the ACCOMPANIMENT track icon).

• The panel AUTO AC-

COMPANIMENT [ON/

OFF] button is automati-

cally turned off when the

ACCOMPANIMENT

track is turned off.

• AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT will automatically

be turned on if it is off

when the ACCOMPANI-

MENT track is selected

for recording. Con-

versely, the ACCOMPA-

NIMENT track will auto-

matically be selected for

recording if the AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT

[ON/OFF] button is

turned on.

• AUTO ACCOMPANI-

MENT cannot be turned

on or off during record-

ing.

MINUS ONE

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

6Record

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the

[START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the

current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. The MEASURE parameter will

also show the current measure number during recording.

START/STOP

/

MULTI PAD

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

9

MEASURE

ATION

61

Song Recording

• Before actually starting to record you can try playing the

PSR-530 the way it is set up by using the “Rehearsal Mode”:

press the [SYNC START] button to temporarily disengage

the record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then press

the [SYNC START] button again to return to the record ready

mode.

• Whenever you record using a SONG, any previously re-

corded material in the same track will be erased.

• If the SONG memory becomes full while recording, “FULL”

will appear on the display and recording will stop (the “Re-

hearsal Mode” will be engaged).

• If you start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button,

nothing will be recording on a MELODY track until you begin

playing on the keyboard. Only rhythm accompaniment will be

recorded on the ACCOMPANIMENT track until you play a

chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard.

• During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn

playback of previously-recorded MELODY tracks or the AC-

COMPANIMENT track on or off as required.

7Stop Recording

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. If you press the

[ENDING] button while recording the ACCOMPANIMENT track, recording will

stop automatically after the ending section has finished. When recording is stopped

the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1” and the record-ready mode

will be engaged.

ENDING

START/STOP

/

8Record Additional Tracks as Required

By repeating steps 5 through 7, above, you can select and record additional

tracks as required.

9Exit From the Record Mode

When you’re finished recording a song, press the [RECORD] button so that its

indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user song can now

be played back in the same way as the demonstration songs (page 52).

• Many types of data re-

corded in user songs can

be re-written (“revoiced”)

as described on page 81.

●Recording from the Middle of the Song

It is possible initiate recording from the middle of the song. If you want to

change the latter half of the song (track), select the Measure number (page 54)

from which you want to record and start recording.

017

Measure

• You can also press the

[SYNC START] button to

stop recording and return

to the record ready mode.

• While the record ready

mode is engaged you can

press the [VOICE] button

to go to the VOICE menu

and change the R1 voice

as required. The R2 voice,

however, cannot be

changed (If the Voice Set

function is on — page 85

— the R2 voice will auto-

matically be changed

when an R1 panel voice is

selected). The record-

ready mode must be dis-

engaged in order to

change the R2 voice and

other settings.

• When you select one of

the Accompaniment

tracks for recording, the

display shows “- - -:Mea-

sure” indicating that re-

cording from the middle of

the song is not possible.

62

Song Recording

◆About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied

You can use three Digital Effects, Reverb, Chorus and DSP, at one time. However,

two or more types from the same group cannot be selected at the same time. Be aware

the following facts especially when recording a song with the different effects applied

to the different tracks.

AThe Reverb type and Chorus type effects can be set and recorded independently

for each track. However, only the latest settings (one each) will be effective if

several effects are used in a song (the latest setting priority).

[EX.] While the panel REVERB button is turned on:

1. Select the Hall 1 (Reverb) for the Accompaniment track, and record the Accompa-

niment track for ten measures from the beginning.

2. Start recording on the Melody 1 track with the Hall 1 (Reverb) selected from the

beginning and then change the effect type to Room 1 (Reverb) respectively from

the fifth measure through the end.

When you play back the song recorded with the above condition, the first four

measures will be played back with the Hall 1 applied to both the Accompaniment

and Melody 1 tracks, and the rest six measures, from fifth through the end, with

the Room 1 applied to both tracks. The effect types set for the Accompaniment

track are replaced with the latest settings. Only the Send Levels for each track

remains the same.

BThe DSP type effects can be set and recorded only for the Melody tracks regardless

of the current effect, insertion or System. Only the latest setting will be effective

if several types are used in a song (the latest setting priority).

[EX.]

1. Turn on the panel DSP button, and start recording on the Melody 1 track with the

Distortion (DSP No.42 Hard) selected for ten measures from the beginning.

2. Turn off the panel DSP button, and start recording on the Melody 2 track without any

effect from the beginning. Then turn on the panel DSP button again at the fifth

measure, and continue recording to the end with the Rotary Speaker1 (DSP No.28

Rotary1) selected.

When you play back the song recorded with the above condition, the first four

measures will be played back with the Distortion applied only to the Melody 1

track, and the rest six measures, from fifth through the end, with the Rotary

Speaker applied only to the Melody 2 track. The DSP type set for the Melody 1

track is taken over by the one set for the Melody 2 track.

63

Song Recording

Clearing Song Data

This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-530 SONG

memory.

Clearing an Entire Song

While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU

[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “SongClr?” function, then press the [+] (YES)

button: “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time

to actually clear the currently selected user song (the demonstration songs and

cartridge songs cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear

operation.

Clearing Selected Melody Tracks

While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU

[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “TrkClr?” function. The SONG tracks icons

corresponding to MELODY tracks which contain data will flash (the ACCOMPANI-

MENT track cannot be cleared — neither can tracks in demonstration or cartridge

songs). Use the TRACK buttons to select track you want to clear (frame will appear

continuously around the selected track.) Once the desired track has been selected,

“Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the

currently selected track. Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

YEs

SongClr? Sure?

78

0

9

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

TrkClr?

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

OVERALL

REGIST

MEMORY

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

MULTI PAD

1

MINUS ONE

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

CHORUS DSP

64

Style Recording

The PSR-530 lets you record up to three original “user styles” which can be used for auto-

accompaniment in the same way as the preset styles. The user styles are recorded as style

numbers 101, 102, and 103, and each style can be recorded with the full complement of 8

tracks (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE

2) and 5 sections (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, ENDING, FILL).

• Material recorded on the STYLE tracks will be retained even after turning the power

off. See page 98 for the details.

• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,

or the batteries fail during recording.

• The REGISTRATION MEMORY cannot be recalled during style recording.

• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

●The STYLE tracks record the following operations and data:

• Note on/off.

• Velocity.

• Voice number (drum kit number)*

• Pitch bend.

Only one event of the item marked with * can be recorded for each track of the sections.

• Up to approximately

1,980 notes for a sec-

tion (totally ca. 3,960

notes) can be re-

corded in the PSR-

530 STYLE tracks.

1Select a Style To Begin With

Select a style from one of the 100 presets that is close to the type of style you

want to create.

Style Recording Procedure

• If none of the preset styles

is appropriate, select one

that has the same time sig-

nature and number of mea-

sures as the one you want

to create, then use the “All

Clear” function (page 70) to

clear all preset data before

entering your own.

• If you select a blank user

style to begin with (101 …

103), the style will be in 4/4

time and all sections except

FILL will be 2 measures

long. FILL will be 1 mea-

sure long.

65

Style Recording

3Select the STYLE Record mode

Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE record mode. The STYLE menu

will automatically be selected and a user style number will appear on the top line

of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,

indicating that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged. Also, the frame

surrounding the style track icons and the auto-accompaniment section button

(INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, and ENDING) indicators will flash, indicating that

a section and track must be selected before recording can begin.

• The icons of tracks which

already contain data will

appear continuously

rather than flashing when

the STYLE record mode is

selcted.

• If the STYLE record mode

is selectd while a preset

style or cartridge style is

selected, the lowest-num-

bered user style which

does not contain any re-

corded data will automati-

cally be selected. If all

user styles already con-

tain data, however, user

style number 101 will be

selected.

• If the STYLE record mode

is selectd while a user

style is selected, that user

style will be selected for

recording.

• The following panel set-

ting changes will occur

when the STYLE record

mode is engaged:

• The measure number will

be reset to “1”.

• If the Metronome function

is on (page 85), the metro-

nome will sound at the cur-

rent tempo.

• The SYNCHRO STOP

function wil be turned off.

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR1

101

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

UserSty1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

MINUS ONE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

2

Engage the Record Ready Mode

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]

button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]

icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record

modes.

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

13

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

UserSng1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

CHORUS DSP

1234

66

Style Recording

4If Necessary, Select a User Style Number

If the desired user style is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, number

buttons, or data dial to select as required.

5Select a Section to Record

Press the auto-accompaniment section button corresponding to the section you

want to record. Press the MAIN A or MAIN B button twice to record a FILL. The

indicator of the selected section button will light continuously and the others will go

out. (The MAIN A or MAIN B indicator will flash when you designate FILL

recording.)

• If you don’t specifi-

cally select a section,

the MAIN A section

will automatically be

selected for recording.

• Although the preset

FILL sections have 4

variations (refer to

page 25), user-style

FILL sections can

have only 1. When

using a preset style

as a basis for a user

style, the AA FILL

variation is used.

MAIN/AUTO FILL ENDINGINTRO

AB

In this case the RHYTHM 1 track will automatically be selected for recording as

the default.

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

6Select a Track to Record

When using a preset style as a basis for a user style, the BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD

2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 tracks must be cleared before they can be selected

for recording (see page 70). The RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks can be

“overdubbed” — i.e. new notes can be added without erasing the original data.

Use the TRACK buttons to select the style track you want to record. A frame

appears continuously around the icon of the track selected for recording, and the

frames surrounding the remaining tracks will disappear.

• Only one track can be

recorded at a time.

• If you don’t specifi-

cally select a track,

the RHYTHM 1 track

will automatically be

selected when you

start recording.

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

67

7Select a Voice, If Necessary

If necessary, select a voice for the track to be recorded by pressing the [VOICE]

button and selecting in the normal way.

8Record

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the

[START/STOP] button. The BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the

current beat, and the MEASURE parameter will show the current measure

number during recording.

The style will repeat continuously when recording is started, so you can

continue to add (“overdub”) notes until the current track is complete. The style

should be recorded based on a CM7 chord (C Major Seven) in order for it to

function properly when used for auto-accompaniment.

START/STOP

/

MULTI PAD

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

9

MEASURE

ATION

Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections:

• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS, and PHRASE

tracks (i.e. C, D, E, G, A, and B).

• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C,

E, G, and B).

Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and

ENDING sections.

CSC CSC

C = chord tone

C, S = scale tones

• Before actually starting to

record you can try playing

the PSR-530 the way it is

set up by using the “Re-

hearsal Mode”: press the

[SYNC START] button to

temporarily disengage the

record ready mode, re-

hearse as necessary, then

press the [SYNC START]

button again to return to the

record ready mode.

• If the memory becomes full

while recording, “Full” will

appear on the display and

recording will stop (the re-

hearsal mode will be en-

gaged).

• Even though you can start

recording with the user style

memory space thoroughly

consumed, “Full” will be

shown on the display and

the recording will forcibly be

stopped. In this case, first

exit from the record mode,

next select the unnecessary

user style, and then enter

the record mode again and

execute the Clear function

(see page 70) to secure the

free space to record.

• For recording the RHYTHM

1/2 tracks, the instrument

symbols printed on the front

edge of the panel show you

the instrument assignments

to each key. See Keyboard

Percussion on page 19 for

playing each drum/percus-

sion sound.

9Stop Recording

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. When recording is

stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1”.

• You can also press the

[SYNC START] button to

stop recording and return to

the record ready mode.

START/STOP

/

Style Recording

• The Registration Memory

buttons will be disabled in

the style record mode.

68

Style Recording

10 Record Additional Sections & Tracks as Required

By repeating steps 5 through 9, above, you can select and record additional sections

and tracks as required.

11 Exit From the Record Mode

When you’re finished recording a style, press the [RECORD] button so that its

indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user style can now be

used in the same way as the preset styles (page 22).

• The voice data in spe-

cific user style tracks

can be “revoiced” in

the same way as the

preset styles, as de-

scribed on page 80.

This, however, does

not actually rewrite

the user style data. In

order to actually

change the user style

data first use the

revoice function, then

immediately engage

and disengage the

style record mode

without recording any

data.

Drum Cancel

This function makes it possible to erase specific drum instruments from the

RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks.

While recording either the RHYTHM 1 or RHYTHM 2 track, use the SUB MENU

[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “:Cancel”.

Then press the key on the key board corresponding to the instrument you want to

cancel.

Cancel

69

Quantize

Quantization can be used to align notes to the nearest specified beat to tighten up

loose timing.

1With the style record ready mode (or rehearsal mode) engaged and the tartget style

and its section selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the

“YES:Quantiz?”.

Quantize Value Note

4 Quarter note

6 Quarter note triplet

8 Eighth note

12 Eighth note triplet

16 Sixteenth note

24 Sixteenth note triplet

32 Thirty-second note

3Press the SUB MENU [▼] button once so that “ : Execute?” appears on the display.

Then press the [+] (YES) button to execute the quantize function, or the [–] (NO)

button to cancel.

2Press the [+] (YES) button to engage the quantize function (or [–] to abort). The

current quantize value will appear to the left of “Quantize” on the top line of the

display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or data dial to select the desired quantize value

(see the chart below). When the quantize function is executed, all notes in the target

track will be aligned with the nearest note of the corresponding value.

YES

Quantiz?

4

Quantize

Execute?

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

Style Recording

70

Style Recording

Clearing User Style Data

This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-530 User Style

tracks.

Clearing an Entire Style

While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU

[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “All Clr?” function, then press the [+] (YES) button:

“Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time to

actually clear the currently selected user style (the preset styles and cartridge styles

cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

Clearing Selected Style Tracks

While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged and a section is

selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “TrkClr” function. The

style track icons corresponding to tracks which contain data will flash. Use the

TRACK buttons to select track(s) you want to clear (frames will appear continuously

around the selected tracks).

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

TrkClr?

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

OVERALL

REGIST

MEMORY

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

MULTI PAD

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

YEs

All Clr? Sure?

78

0

9

Sure?

78

0

9

Once the desired tracks have been selected, “Sure?” will appear on the display.

Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected track(s). Press [–]

(NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

71

In addition to the preset MULTI PAD sets, the PSR-530 has 4 user-recordable sets that you

can use to store your own creations.

• Material recorded in the MULTI PADs will be retained even after turning the power

off. See page 98 for the details.

• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,

or the batteries fail during recording.

• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

●The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data:

• Note on/off.

• Velocity.

• R1 voice (voice number, volume, reverb send level, chorus send level,

octave, pan).

• Chord match on/off (pad 1…4).

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range.

• Sustain on/off.

• Up to approximately

100 notes for each

pad can be recorded

in the PSR-530

MULTI PADs.

1Engage the Record Ready Mode

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]

button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4] icons

will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes.

MUTI PAD Recording Procedure

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

13

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

UserSng1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

CHORUS DSP

1234

Multi Pad Recording

72

Multi Pad Recording

2Select the MULTI PAD Record Mode

Press any MULTI PAD button ([1] … [4]) to select the MULTI PAD record mode

(the MULTI PAD button you press will be selected for recording). The MULTI PAD

menu will automatically be selected and a user pad set number will appear on the top

line of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,

indicating that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged.

• If the [RECORD] but-

ton is pressed while a

preset pad set is se-

lected, the lowest-

numbered user pad

set which does not

contain any recorded

data will automatically

be selected. If other

user pad sets already

contain data, how-

ever, user pad num-

ber 1 will be selected.

• The DSP effect can-

not be turned on dur-

ing MULTI PAD re-

cording or the MULTI

PAD record standby

mode. If the DSP ef-

fect is on when the

MULTI PAD record

mode is engaged, it

will automatically be

turned off.

• If the Metronome

function is on (page

85), the metronome

will sound at the cur-

rent tempo.

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

007

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

UserPad1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

MINUS ONE

CHORUS DSP

21

MUTLI PAD

43

1234

OVERALL

REGIST

MEMORY

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

MULTI PAD

3If Necessary, Select a User Pad Set Number

If the desired user pad set is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the

number buttons, or the data dial to select as required.

37

UserPad1

4If Necessary, Select a MULTI PAD to Record

If the MULTI PAD you pressed in step 2, above, is not the one you want to record,

you can select any other pad at this point simply pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD

button. The selected MULTI PAD icon will appear in the display.

21

MUTLI PAD

43

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

MULTI PAD

1

MEASURE

12344

73

5Specify Chord Match if Required

If you record a MULTI PAD with a pitched voice, the Chord Match function

(see page 51) can be specified for that pad by using the SUB MENU buttons to

select the Chord Match function for the corresponding pad (“Pad1Chd” …

“Pad4Chd”) while in the record standby or rehearsal mode, and then using the

[+] button to turn it “On” or “Off” as you like.

on

Pad1Chd

6Record

Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the

[START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the

current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. If you are recording a Chord

Match phrase, be sure to base your phrase on a CM7 chord to ensure proper

Chord Match operation. See page 67 for more details on recording around a

CM7 chord.

7Stop Recording

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

START/STOP

/

MULTI PAD

ONE TOUCH

SETTING

9

MEASURE

ATION

START/STOP

/

• Before actually starting to

record you can try playing the

PSR-530 the way it is set up

by using the “Rehearsal

Mode”: press the [SYNC

START] button to temporarily

disengage the record ready

mode, rehearse as necessary,

then press the [SYNC START]

button again to return to the

record ready mode.

• Whenever you record a

MULTI PAD, any previously

recorded material in the same

MULTI PAD will be erased.

• If the memory becomes full

while recording, “Full” will ap-

pear on the display and re-

cording will stop (the record-

ready mode will be engaged).

• The Chord Match on/off status

can be changed in the SUB

MENU “MULTI PAD” even af-

ter exiting the recording mode.

Multi Pad Recording

8Record Additional Pads as Required

By repeating steps 3 through 7, above, you can select and record additional

pads as required.

9Exit From the Record Mode

When you’re finished recording pads, press the [RECORD] button so that its

indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user pads can now

be played back in the same way as the preset pads (page 49).

74

Clearing MULTI PAD Data

This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-530 MULTI

PADs.

Clearing an Entire Pad Set

While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “BankClr” function, then press the [+] (YES)

button: “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time

to actually clear the currently selected pad set (the preset pad sets cannot be cleared).

Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

YEs

BankClr? Sure?

78

0

9

Clearing Selected MULTI PADs

While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB

MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “PadClr” function. The MULTI PAD icons

corresponding to pads which contain data will flash (preset pad set data cannot be

cleared).

REGISTRATION

VOICE L VOICE R2

76 101

PadClr?

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

HARMONY TEMPO

116

REGIST

MEMORY

MULTI PAD

1MULTI PAD

1234

Use the MULTI PAD buttons to select the pad you want to clear (the icon

corresponding to the selected pad will flash). “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press

the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected pad. Press [–] (NO) if you

want to abort the clear operation.

21

MUTLI PAD

43

MULTI PAD

1

MEASURE

1234

Multi Pad Recording

• If the pad you se-

lected has already

been cleared, “- - - :

PadClr?” will appear

on the display.

• “- - -: PadClr?” will be

shown on the display

if all the pads for the

selected set are

cleared.

75

The PSR-530 features a cartridge slot which accepts pre-programmed Yamaha Music

Cartridges containing style and/or song data. One sample Music Cartridge containing song

data is supplied with the PSR-530. Others are available from your Yamaha dealer.

For Cartridges without the mark, the

bottom of the serrated edges of the

Cartridge should be even with the panel

edge (not above it).

The triangular mark on the front of the Cartridge

should be completely below the panel edge when

the Cartridge is properly seated.

◆Inserting a Music Cartridge

With the power OFF, insert the Music Cartridge into the cartridge slot as shown,

and press down firmly until the Cartridge is seated properly (as shown in the

illustration). The Cartridge is shaped so that it will only fit in the slot one way -

don’t try to force it in the wrong way. Turn the power back ON again after inserting.

◆Music Cartridge Handling Precautions

• Do not leave Music Cartridges in lo-

cations which are subject to exces-

sive heat or humidity.

• Do not drop Music Cartridges or sub-

ject them to strong shock.

• Do not disassemble Music Cartridges.

• Do not directly touch the Music

Cartridge’s electrical contacts. Per-

sistently touching it may cause to

break electrical contacts or generate

static electricity. Static electric

charges can cause loss of data and

unreliable operation.

• Do not insert objects or cartridges

other than Yamaha Music Cartridges

in the PortaTone cartridge slot. Doing

so can result in serious damage to the

instrument.

•Never attempt to insert or remove a

cartridge when the STAND BY/ON

switch is ON. Doing so can result in

loss of the PSR-530 memory data

(song data/registration memory

data) or complete lack of control.

• The Music Cartridge data may not be

selected or played back correctly, if

the electrical contacts on the Music

Cartridge are affected with dust. If

this happens, insert and remove the

Music Cartridge several times. This

may solve the problem. If the prob-

lem still happens, wipe and clean the

electrical contacts on the Music Car-

tridge with a dry soft cloth.

• Be sure to insert the

Music Cartridge when

you recall the registra-

tion settings based on

the cartridge data or

playback the song

based on the cartridge

data. Otherwise, “No

Cart (Cartridge)” will

appear on the display.

Using Music Cartridges

76

Using Music Cartridges

Cartridge Songs

Using Yamaha Music Cartridges (the one supplied with the PSR-530 includes 7

songs, others are available from your Yamaha dealer), the PSR-530 will let you enjoy

listening to automated performances, or function as your “private music tutor,”

allowing you to practice various parts of a piece while the others are played

automatically.

Cartridge Song Playback

1Select the Cartridge Menu

Press the [CARTRIDGE] button to select the CARTRIDGE menu (the triangular

indicator will appear next to “CARTRIDGE” to the right of the display). The number

and name of the currently selected cartridge song will appear on the top line of the

display, the CART icon will appear in the upper left corner of the display, and the song

track and volume icons near the bottom of the display will appear framed. The

[START/STOP] indicator will flash.

01

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

530XG

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

START/STOP

/

2Select a Cartridge Song Number

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the cartridge song

number you want to play. The song number can also be incremented by pressing the

[CARTRIDGE] button: press briefly to increment by one, or hold for continuous

incrementing.

• Cartridge song num-

bers can also be se-

lected from the SONG

menu as follows:

press and hold the

number [3] button un-

til the cartridge icon

appears in the dis-

play, then enter the

number of the car-

tridge song you want

to select via the num-

ber buttons in the nor-

mal way.

• The cartridge songs

can also be selected

from the SONG menu

by using the [–] and

[+] buttons or data

dial to go beyond the

highest or lowest in-

ternal song numbers

— e.g. pressing the

[+] button while inter-

nal song number 16 is

selected will select

cartridge song num-

ber 1 (the cartridge

icon will appear).

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

• The included music

cartridge is made ex-

clusively for the PSR-

530. The data on the

cartridge may not be

played back properly

with the other models.

77

3Start Playback

Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. You can turn

the MELODY and ACCOMPANIMENT tracks on and off during playback as required

by using the TRACK buttons.

• Playback can be

started from any mea-

sure — page 54.

• The playback tempo

can be changed freely

as required.

• Cartridge song data

cannot be revoiced.

• You may not be able

to play back the car-

tridge songs properly

just after turning the

power on since it

takes for a while for

the PSR-530 to read

the cartridge data.

START/STOP

/

Cartridge Accompaniment Styles

Optional Style Music Cartridges provides extra accompaniment styles that can be

used in the same way as the internal accompaniment styles after pressing the [STYLE]

button to select the STYLE menu.

Cartridges which contain both song and style data require a slightly different style

selection procedure: Press and hold the number [3] button until the cartridge icon

appears to the left of the style name in the display, then enter the number of the

cartridge style you want to select via the number buttons or data dial in the normal way.

The cartridge styles can also be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial

to go beyond the highest or lowest internal style numbers — e.g. pressing the [+]

button while internal style number 100 is selected will select cartridge style number

01 (the cartridge icon will appear).

The cartridge styles are used in exactly the same way as the internal accompaniment

styles (page 22).

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

• Some cartridge styles,

for example, have A

and B intro and end-

ing sections as well

as A and B main sec-

tions. In such a case,

if the [INTRO] and

MAIN/AUTO FILL [A]

buttons are pressed in

order to start the ac-

companiment with an

introduction and then

go to the main A sec-

tion, the intro A sec-

tion will play. If the

[INTRO] and MAIN/

AUTO FILL [B] but-

tons are pressed, the

intro B section will

play. A similar situa-

tion applies to end-

ings: if the main A or

B section is playing

and the [ENDING]

button is pressed, the

ending A or B section

will play accordingly.

• You may not be able

to select the cartridge

styles just after turn-

ing the power on

since it takes for a

while for the PSR-530

to read the cartridge

style data.

Using Music Cartridges

78

The PSR-530 REVOICE function lets you change the following parameters for the R1, R2

and L voices, the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT tracks, and the user SONG tracks.

● Revoice Parameters

Parameter Display Range Comments

Voice Voice Name 1 … 692 Assigns a voice number to the specified PSR-530 voice or track.

Volume Volume 0 … 127 Sets the volume of the specified PSR-530 voice or track.

Octave Octave –2 … 2 Shifts the pitch of the specified voice or track up or down by one

or two octaves. A setting of “0” produces normal pitch.

Pan Pan –7 … 7 Positions the sound of the specified voice or track from left to right

in the stereo sound field. “–7” is full left, “7” is full right, “0” is center,

and all other settings are corresponding positions in between.

Reverb Send Level RevSndLv 0 … 127 Sets the reverb send level for the specified voice or track, and

thus the amount of reverb effect applied to that voice or track.

Chorus Send Level ChoSndLv 0 … 127 Sets the chorus send level for the specified voice or track, and

thus the amount of chorus effect applied to that voice or track.

DSP Send Level DspSndLv 0 … 127 Sets the DSP send level for the specified voice or track, and thus

the amount of DSP effect applied to that voice or track.

1Select the VOICE REVOICE Mode

While the VOICE menu is selected, press the [REVOICE] button (actually, the

order here is not important: you can also press the [VOICE] button after pressing the

[REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE] button indicator will light and a frame will

appear around the R1 voice icon in the display (i.e. the R1 voice is initially selected

for revoicing).

• The VOICE REVOICE

mode will automati-

cally be selected if the

[REVOICE] button is

pressed while any

menu other than

STYLE or SONG is

selected.

• The VOICE REVOICE

mode cannot be se-

lected while one of

the record modes is

engaged.

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

001

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

GrandPno

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

1

REVOICE

CHORUS DSP

Revoicing

79

Revoicing

2If Necessary Select a Voice to Revoice

Use the three rightmost TRACK buttons to select the voice you want to

revoice: L, R2, or R1. A frame will appear around the icon of the selected voice.

• The TRACK button below

the selected voice can be

used to turn the voice on or

off. Make sure that the

voice is turned on if you

want to monitor the sound

while revoicing (the R1

voice cannot be turned off).

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

TRACK

3Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The

name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the

right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number

buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the

“Revoice Parameters” chart on page 78.

• You can jump directly to the

REVOICE R2 VOICE dis-

play by pressing and hold-

ing the [DUAL VOICE] but-

ton for a few seconds.

• You can jump directly to the

REVOICE L VOICE display

by pressing and holding the

[SPLIT VOICE] button for a

few seconds.

100

RevSndLv

100

ChoSndLv

100

DspSndLv

0

Pan

0

Octave

100

Volume

001

GrandPno

4Repeat as Required and Exit When Done

Repeat steps 2 and 3, above, to revoice the voices as required, then press the

[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE

mode.

REVOICE

• Minus settings for the Oc-

tave and Pan parameters

can be directly entered by

pressing the appropriate

number button while hold-

ing the [–] button.

• When the DSP type is set

as insertion, the DSP depth

parameter cannot be

changed.

• The REVOICE mode will

automatically be exited if

the MENU [

▲

] and [

▼

] but-

tons are used to select any

of the menus to the left of

the display, or if the [CAR-

TRIDGE] button is pressed.

• Save any revoice settings

you want to keep to the

PSR-530 REGISTRATION

MEMORY (page 47). The

revoice setting are tempo-

rary and will be lost if the

power is turned off, a differ-

ent R1 panel voice is se-

lected while the Voice Set

function is on, or a REGIS-

TRATION MEMORY is re-

called.

80

Revoicing

1Select the STYLE REVOICE Mode

While the STYLE menu and the style you want to revoice are selected, press the

[REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also press

the [STYLE] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE]

button indicator will light and a frame will appear around the RHYTHM 1 track

icon in the display (i.e. the RHYTHM 1 track is initially selected for revoicing).

Revoicing a Style

1

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

FINGERING

REGISTRATION MULTI PAD

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

201

VOICE L VOICE R2 VOICE R1

76 101 1

Std.Kit1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

0

REPEAT

1

MEASURE

HARMONY TEMPO

116

SYNC

STOP

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

REVOICE

CHORUS DSP

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

RHYTHM

1BASS CHORD

1CHORD

2PAD PHRASE

1PHRASE

2

RHYTHM

2

LR2R1

TRACK

3If Necessary Select a Track to Revoice

Use the TRACK buttons to select the accompaniment track you want to revoice:

RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, or

PHRASE 2. A frame will appear around the icon of the selected track.

2Select the Section(s) to be Revoiced

Press INTRO, MAIN A/B or ENDING button(s) to select the section(s).

• The TRACK button below

the selected track can be

used to turn the track on

or off. Make sure that the

track is turned on if you

want to monitor the sound

while revoicing.

• Only drum kits (voice

numbers 127 … 136) can

be selected for the

RHYTHM 1 track.

• Any voice can be selected

for the RHYTHM 2 track,

but please note that the

RHYTHM 2 track is not af-

fected by the AUTO AC-

COMPANIMENT feature.

• The OCTAVE parameter

and the DSP send level

cannot be edited in the

STYLE REVOICE mode.

• The STYLE REVOICE

mode can even be se-

lected by pressing the

[REVOICE] button while

an accompaniment is

playing.

• The STYLE REVOICE

mode cannot be selected

while one of the record

modes is engaged.

• The STYLE REVOICE

mode cannot be selected

while a song or voice is

being revoiced during

song playback.

• The Registration Memory

Freeze function will auto-

matically be turned on

when entering the Style

Revoice Mode.

• Style revoicing affects all

sections of the selected

style.

81

5Repeat as Required and Exit When Done

Repeat steps 2 and 4, above, to revoice the tracks as required, then press the

[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE

mode.

REVOICE

1Select the SONG REVOICE Mode

While the SONG menu and the user song you want to revoice are selected, press

the [REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also

press the [SONG] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [RE-

VOICE] button indicator will light and a frame will appear around the MELODY

1 track icon in the display (i.e. the MELODY 1 track is initially selected for

revoicing).

Revoicing a User Song

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

SONG

REVOICE

4Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The

name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the

right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number

buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the

“Revoice Parameters” chart on page 78.

• Revoicing a user song actu-

ally rewrites the recorded

song data, so the original

data will be lost.

• The pre-programmed inter-

nal songs and cartridge

songs cannot be revoiced.

• The SONG REVOICE mode

cannot be selected while

one of the record modes is

engaged.

• The SONG REVOICE mode

cannot be selected while a

style or voice is being

revoiced during accompani-

ment style playback.

Revoicing

• “- - -” will appear on the top

line of the display if you se-

lect an accompaniment

track which contains no

data for revoicing, and

revoicing will not be pos-

sible.

• Minus settings for the Oc-

tave and Pan parameters

can be directly entered by

pressing the appropriate

number button while hold-

ing the [–] button.

• When a voice (especially

bass voices) used for a

Style is changed from the

XG Voice to the Panel

Voice using the Revoice

function, the octave played

for the voice may change.

• The REVOICE mode will

automatically be exited if

the MENU [

▲

] and [

▼

] but-

tons are used to select any

of the menus to the left of

the display, or if the [CAR-

TRIDGE] button is pressed.

• Save any revoice settings

you want to keep to the

PSR-530 REGISTRATION

MEMORY (page 47). The

revoice setting are tempo-

rary and will be lost if the

power is turned off, a differ-

ent style is selected, or a

REGISTRATION MEMORY

is recalled.

82

3Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter.

The name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display

to the right of the parameter’s current value.

4Repeat as Required and Exit When Done

Repeat steps 2 and 3, above, to revoice the tracks as required, then press the

[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE

mode.

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set the

parameter’s value as required. Refer to the “Revoice Parameters” chart on

page 78.

100

RevSndLv

70

RevSndLv

123

456

78

0

9

NO YES

• “- - -” will appear on the top line

of the display if you select a

song track which contains no

data for revoicing, and revoicing

will not be possible.

• Only the Volume parameter can

be revoiced for the ACCOMPA-

NIMENT track. If you attempt to

change any other parameter “- -

-” will appear on the top line of

the display and revoicing will

not be possible.

• If the R1 and R2 voices have

been recorded to a single track,

only the R1 voice can be

revoiced.

• Minus settings for the Octave

and Pan paraneters can be di-

rectly entered by pressing the

appropriate number button

while holding the [–] button.

• Only one song revoice param-

eter can be recorded per track.

If you revoice a song while play-

ing back the song, only the last-

entered data will be recorded.

• The REVOICE mode will auto-

matically be exited if the MENU

[

▲

] and [

▼

] buttons are used to

select any of the menus to the

left of the display, or if the

[CARTRIDGE] button is

pressed.

• Since revoicing a user song ac-

tually rewrites the song data,

the revoiced song will remain in

memory as long as a working

set of batteries is installed in the

PSR-530, or the AC adapter is

connected.

REVOICE

Revoicing

2If Necessary Select a Track to Revoice

Use the TRACK buttons to select the SONG track you want to revoice:

MELODY 1 … MELODY 4, or ACCOMP. A frame will appear around the icon

of the selected track.

MINUS ONE

MELODY

1234

MELODY MELODY MELODY

ACCOM-

PANIMENT

VOICE VOICE VOICE

LR2R1

MINUS ONE

• The TRACK button below the

selected track can be used to

turn the track on or off. Make

sure that the track is turned on if

you want to monitor the sound

while revoicing.

• The revoicing cannot be ex-

ecuted when the memory space

is almost full with the user

songs.

• When you revoice the user song

data during its playback and exit

from the REVOICE mode, the

song will automatically be

stopped.

83

Some of the functions in the OVERALL function group have already been described in

appropriate sections of this manual. Others will be introduced for the first time in this section.

Refer to the chart below for the page numbers on which each function is described. The chart

also lists the full name of each function, the abbreviated name which appears on the display,

and the available settings or range of settings. Ranges are indicated by two or more values

separated by ellipsis (…).

Function Display Settings Page

Touch Sensitivity TouchSns 0 … 127 84

Pitch Bend Range PBRange 01 … 12 45

Master Tuning Tuning~~ –50 … +50 84

Scale Tuning Note SC.Note~C … b 84

Scale Tuning SC.Tune~–64 … 63 84

Song Transpose SongTrns –12 … +12 85

Metronome Metronom oFF, on 85

Split Voice Split Point S.Split~0 … 127 21

Accompaniment Split Point AccSpPnt 0 … 127 29

Fingering Mode FngrngMd SF, F1, F2, FuL, MuL 30

Voice Set VoiceSet oFF, on 85

To access an OVERALL function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move

the triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired function from

within the OVERALL menu. When a function is selected the current setting will

appear to the left of the function name on the top line of the display. Once the function

has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number buttons, where

applicable) to set the function as required.

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

Overall Functions

100

TouchSns

84

Overall Functions

■Touch Sensitivity

This function sets the keyboard touch sensitivity. The range is from “0” to “127”.

The higher the value the higher the sensitivity. When the touch sensitivity value is set

to “0”, “oFF” appears in the display and the same volume is produced no matter how

hard you play the keys. — this setting can produce a more realistic effect with voices

that normally do not have touch response: e.g. organ and harpsichord.

■Master Tuning

The Tuning function sets the overall pitch of the PSR-530 over a ±100 cent range

(from –100 to +100) in 1-cent increments. Since 1 cent is 1/100th of a semitone, the

total tuning range is from a semitone below normal pitch to a semitone above normal

pitch.

100

TouchSns

• The “normal” tuning

value (“0”) can be re-

called by simulta-

neously pressing the

[–] and [+] buttons.

• Minus values can be

entered by using the

number buttons while

holding the [–] button.

■Scale Tuning

Scale tuning allows each individual note of the octave to be tuned over range from

–64 to +63 cents in 1-cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). This makes it

possible to produce subtle tuning variations, or tune the instrument to totally different

scales (e.g. classic or Arabic scales).

First use the SC.Note function to select the note to be tuned. The range is from C

to b: C, db, d, Eb, E, F, Gb, G, Ab, A, bb, b.

000

Tuning

• The scale tuning set-

tings are common to

each octave on the

keyboard.

• The Accompaniment

and Multi Pad sound

is affected by Scale

Tuning.

• The “normal” tuning

value (“0”) can be re-

called by simulta-

neously pressing the

[–] and [+] buttons.

• Minus values can be

entered by using the

number buttons while

holding the [–] button.

Then use the SC.Tune function to tune the selected note as required.

C

SC.Note

-50

SC.Tune

Db Eb

C# D#Gb Ab Bb

F# G# A#

C D E F G A B

db Gb Ab

CdEFGAb

Eb bb

note

note

■Pitch Bend Range

See page 45.

85

■Metronome

When turned “on” the PSR-530 metronome will sound during AUTO ACCOMPA-

NIMENT playback as well as SONG playback and recording.

■Split Voice Split Point

See page 21.

■Accompaniment Split Point

See page 29.

■Fingering Mode

See page 30.

■Voice Set

The VOICE SET feature brings out the best in each individual voice by automati-

cally setting a range of important voice-related parameters whenever an R1 panel

voice (voice numbers 1 … 200) is selected. The parameters that may be set by the

VOICE SET feature are listed below. This function lets you turn VOICE SET on or off,

as required.

on

Metronom

on

VoiceSet

●Voice Set parameter list

■Song Transpose

This function allows you to transpose only the song to be played back. That means

you can play along with your desired song (Minus-one function) in the desired key

without affecting your performance.

• Since the Transpose

function (page 46)

sets the overall trans-

pose value, if it is

changed, the Song

Transpose value will

be changed by the

same amount at the

same time.

• The “normal” trans-

pose value (“00”) can

be recalled by simul-

taneously pressing

the [–] and [+] but-

tons.

• Minus values can be

entered by using the

number buttons while

holding the [–] button.

• The Song Transpose

value is automatically

set to “00” when the

record mode is en-

gaged.

02

SongTrns

• R1 Voice (Volume, Pan)

• R2 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb

send level, chorus send level, DSP send level)

• DSP return level

• Harmony type, volume

• Pitch Bend Range

Overall Functions

The parameter below is set whether or not the voice set

function is on or off.

• R1 Voice (Octave, reverb send level, chorus send level,

DSP send level)

• Reverb ON/OFF

• Chorus ON/OFF

• DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/OFF

• DSP type

• The Voice Set func-

tion is on by default

when the power is ini-

tially turned on.

86

In the rear panel of your PSR-530, there are MIDI terminals (MIDI IN, MIDI OUT), a TO HOST

terminal, and a HOST SELECT switch. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your

musical possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how

you can use MIDI on your PSR-530.

MIDI Functions

What’s MIDI?

No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”

In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an

acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are

easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some

strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note

sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note

(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is

played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the

information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?

For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on

the PSR-530 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note,

the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what

voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when was

it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent

to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the

stored sampling note.

● Acoustic guitar note production ● Digital instrument note production

Pluck a string and the body resonates the

sound. Based on playing information from the keyboard, a

sampling note stored in the tone generator is played

through the speakers.

Example of Keyboard Information

Voice number (with what voice) 01 (grand piano)

Note number (with which key) 60 (C3)

Note on (when was it pressed) and Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)

note off (when was it released)

Velocity (about how strong) 120 (strong)

Tone Generator

(Electronic circuit)

LR

Playing the keyboard

Sampling

Note Sampling

Note

87

MIDI Functions

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which

allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending

and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other

types of MIDI data, or messages.

The PSR-530 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and

various types of controller data. The PSR-530 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI

messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels,

voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for

the various parts.

MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System

messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the

PSR-530 can receive/transmit.

●System Messages

This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages

include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each

instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-530 are shown in the MIDI Data

Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 110 and 122.

Message Name PSR-530 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played.

Each message includes a specific note number which corre-

sponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based

on how hard the key is stuck.

Program Change Voice setting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change Revoice setting(volume, pan pot, etc.)

Message Name PSR-530 Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc.

Realtime Messages Clock setting

Start/stop operation

●Channel Messages

The PSR-530 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is

usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel

messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each

of the 16 channels.

88

● Remotely play another PSR-530

MIDI Functions

• When using the TO HOST

terminal to connect to a

personal computer using

Windows, a Yamaha MIDI

driver must be installed in

the personal computer.

The Yamaha MIDI driver

can be obtained at

Yamaha’s home page on

the World Wide Web,

<http://www.yamaha.co.jp/

english/xg/>.

• Special MIDI cables (sold

separately) must be used

for connecting to MIDI de-

vices. They can be bought

at music stores, etc.

• Never use MIDI cables

longer than about 15

meters. Cables longer

than this can pick up

noise which can cause

data errors.

What You Can Do with MIDI

MIDI transmit

MIDI receive

INTO HOST

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

MIDI OUT

◆MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal

In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must

be connected by a cable.

There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the PSR-530 to the

MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO HOST

port of the PSR-530 to the serial port of a personal computer using a special cable.

If you connect from the PSR-530 TO HOST terminal to a personal computer,

the PSR-530 will be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning that a specialized

MIDI interface device is not necessary.

In the rear panel of the PSR-530, there are two kinds of terminals, the MIDI

terminals and the TO HOST terminal.

• MIDI IN ......... Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.

• MIDI OUT ..... Transmits the PSR-530’s keyboard information as MIDI data to another

MIDI device.

• TO HOST ...... Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer.

PSR-530 PSR-530

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

Bulk send/receive (page 95).

Bulk send/receive (page 95).

● Save/load song and registration memory data to/from the MDF2

PSR-530 MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

Save/load data

MDF2

MIDI transmit

MIDI receive

89

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PSR-530

MIDI Functions

MIDI receive settings (page 93).

Receive mode for all channels

set to “normal.”

● Use the PSR-530 as a multi tone generator (playing 16 channels at one time).

● Play music from another keyboard (no tone generator) using the PSR-530 XG tone

generator.

MIDI receive settings (page 93).

Clock settings (page 94).

● Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-530 Auto Accompaniment

and Multi Pad features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After

recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the PSR-530

(playback).

MIDI transmit setting (page 92).

Initial send (page 95).

• When using a per-

sonal computer, spe-

cial software (se-

quencer software) is

needed.

PSR-530

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI receive [ex.] XG song

floppy disks

Available disks

MIDI receive MIDI keyboard with no

tone generator

PSR-530 MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

MIDI transmit

MIDI receive

(playback)

Can be used to edit and arrange

after recording

Personal computer,

MDF2, QY700, etc.

MDF2, QY700,

Personal com-

puter, etc.

90

●When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS-

422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface,

then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN

terminal of the PSR-530, as show in the diagram below.

Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR-530 to “MIDI.”

PSR-530

MIDI INMIDI OUT

MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

PSR-530

MIDI IN

RS-422

MIDI OUT

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

MIDI interface

■ Connect using the PSR-530 MIDI terminals

Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI

terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-530.

For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable.

●When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT

terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-530. Set the

HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”

Computer (sequencer software)

Computer (sequencer software)

MIDI Functions

You can enjoy using personal computer music software when you connect your

PSR-530’s TO HOST terminal or MIDI terminals to a personal computer.

There are two ways to connect.

● Connect using the PSR-530 MIDI terminals.

● Connect using the TO HOST terminal.

Connecting to a Personal Computer

(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch)

91

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the “MIDI” position, input and output in the TO HOST

switch is ignored.

• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the

application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details,

carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

MIDI Functions

■ Connect using the TO HOST terminal

Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422

terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-530.

For the connection cable, use the cable below (sold separately) that matches the

personal computer type.

• If you connect from

the PSR-530 TO

HOST terminal to a

personal computer,

the PSR-530 will be

used as a MIDI inter-

face device, meaning

that a specialized

MIDI interface device

is not necessary.

• When the HOST SE-

LECT switch is set to

“MAC,” “PC-1,” or

“PC-2,” don’t use the

MIDI IN/OUT termi-

nals. (MIDI data can-

not be sent or re-

ceived through the

MIDI terminals).

• “Host is Offline!!” will

be shown on the dis-

play, when the Host

Select switch is set

appropriately and the

serial cable is con-

nected to the PSR-

530 TO HOST but not

to the PC’s serial port

(or the cable is prop-

erly connected to the

PC which is currently

turned off).

Macintosh Series

Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal

on the PSR-530 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-530 HOST

SELECT switch in the “MAC” position.

• Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz. For details, carefully read

the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

IBM-PC/AT Series

Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-530 using

a serial cable (D-SUB 9P —> MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PSR-530 HOST SELECT switch

in the “PC-2” position.

mini DIN 8-pin mini DIN 8-pin

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

• When using a D-SUB 25P —> MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a D-SUB 9P plug adaptor on the

computer side of the cable.

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software

you are using, see the owner’s manuals for each of them.

mini DIN 8-pin

D-SUB 9-pin

mini DIN 8-pin

D-SUB 25-pin D-SUB 9-pin

PC-1 PC-2

Mac MIDI

Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.

IBM PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp.

Other company names and product names, etc. in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of

those companies.

92

The PSR-530 MIDI Functions

The PSR-530 has the following MIDI functions.

To access a MIDI function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the

triangular indicator in the display next to “MIDI”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and

[▼] buttons to select the desired function from within the MIDI menu. When a

function is selected the current setting will appear on the top line of the display. Once

the function has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number

buttons, where applicable) to set the function as required.

01

Tr.Ch

OVERALL

DIGITAL

EFFECT

MIDI

Function Display Settings Page

Transmit Channel Tr.Ch~~~ 1 … 16 92

Transmit Track Tr.Trk~~

r1, r2, L, H1, H2, H3, rH2, rH1,

bAS, CH1, CH2, Pad, PH1, PH2,

S1, S1d, S2, S2d, S3, S3d, S4,

S4d, oFF

93

Receive Channel Rcv.Ch~~ 1 … 16 93

Receive Mode Rcv.Mod~nor, oFF, rE 94

Local Control Local~~~ oFF, on 94

External Clock ExtClock oFF, on 94

Bulk Data Send BlkSnd?~None 95

Initial Data Send InitSnd? None 95

MIDI Functions

■Transmit Channel & Transmit Track

The PSR-530 can simultaneously transmit data on all 16 MIDI channels. The

Transmit Channel and Transmit Track functions determine what PSR-530 data is

transmitted via which MIDI channels.

●Transmit Channel

The “Tr.Ch” function selects a MIDI channel to which a PSR-530 track can be

assigned via the Transmit Track function, below. First select a transmit channel,

then the transmit track for that channel. Different tracks can be assigned to each of

the 16 MIDI channels. Any of the standard MIDI channels - 1 through 16 — can

be specified.

01

Tr.Ch

93

MIDI Functions

● Transmit Track

The “Tr.Trk” function selects the track to be transmitted via the transmit

channel specified by the Transmit Channel function, above. The available

settings are as follows:

r1

Tr.Trk

~r1 R1 keyboard voice.

~r2 R2 keyboard voice

~~LL keyboard voice.

~H1 Harmony note 1.

~H2 Harmony note 2.

~H3 Harmony note 3.

rH2 Auto accompaniment rhythm 2 track data.

rH1 Auto accompaniment rhythm 1 track data.

bAS Auto accompaniment bass track data.

CH1 Auto accompaniment chord 1 track data.

CH2 Auto accompaniment chord 2 track data.

Pad Auto accompaniment pad track data.

PH1 Auto accompaniment phrase 1 track data.

PH2 Auto accompaniment phrase 2 track data.

S1 User song melody track 1 data (R1 voice).

S1d User song melody track 1 data (R2 voice).

S2 User song melody track 2 data (R1 voice).

S2d User song melody track 2 data (R2 voice).

S3 User song melody track 3 data (R1 voice).

S3d User song melody track 3 data (R2 voice).

S4 User song melody track 4 data (R1 voice).

S4d User song melody track 4 data (R2 voice).

oFF No data transmitted.

• The initial default channel/track

settings are:

Channel 1 = R1 voice

Channel 2 = L voice

Channel 3 = Bass / Track3

Channel 4 = Chord1 / Track4

Channel 5 = Chord2 / Track5

Channel 6 = Pad / Track6

Channel 7 = Phrase1 / Track7

Channel 8 = Phrase2 / Track8

Channel 9 = Rhythm2 / Track2

Channel 10 = Rhythm1 / Track1

Channel 11 = R2 voice

Channel 12 = Harmony1

Channel 13 = Harmony2

Channel 14 = Harmony3

Channel 15 = Off

Channel 16 = Off

• When a track is assigned to

more than one MIDI channel,

the data from that track is trans-

mitted via the lowest-numbered

channel.

• To avoid MIDI loops which can

cause operational errors, check

the PSR-530 Local Control set-

ting (page 94), and the MIDI

THRU settings of any external

MIDI devices.

• MIDI transmit track settings will

be retained even after turning

the power off. See page 98 for

the details.

■Receive Channel & Receive Mode

The PSR-530 can simultaneously receive data on all 16 MIDI channels,

allowing it to function as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator. The

Receive Channel and Receive Mode functions determine how each channel

will respond to received MIDI data.

●Receive Channel

The “Rcv.Ch” function selects a MIDI channel to which a receive mode is

to be assigned via the Receive Mode function, below. First select a receive

channel, then the receive mode for that channel. Any of the standard MIDI

channels — 1 through 16 — can be specified.

01

Rcv.Ch

94

MIDI Functions

●Receive Mode

The “Rcv.Mod” function specifies the receive mode for the channel selected

via the Receive Channel function, above. The receive mode settings are as

follows:

• MIDI receive mode settings

will be retained even after

turning the power off. See

page 98 for the details.

• The initial default setting for all

channels is “nor.”

• In the Record mode, the Re-

ceive mode settings cannot be

set.

nor

Rcv.Mod

nor “Normal”. Received MIDI data is sent directly to the PSR-530

tone generator. If all channels are set to “nor”, the PSR-530

functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator.

oFF No MIDI data is received on channels set to “oFF”.

~rE “Remote”. Received MIDI data is handled in the same way as

data generated by the PSR-530’s own keyboard. In other words,

a remote keyboard could be used to control the PSR-530 AUTO

ACCOMPANIMENT functions, etc.

■Local Control

“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-530 keyboard

controls the internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played

directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control on” since the

internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control

can be turned off, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal

voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI

OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the

internal tone generator can respond to MIDI information received on channels

set to the “nor” (normal) mode via the MIDI IN connector. This means that

while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the PSR-530 internal

voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-530 keyboard.

The default Local Control setting is “on”.

■Clock

Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as

required. When disabled (“off”), all of the time-based functions (Auto Accom-

paniment, SONG recording and playback, etc.) are controlled by its own

internal clock. When MIDI clock reception is enabled (“on”), however, all

timing is controlled by an external MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN

terminal (in this case the PSR-530 TEMPO setting has no effect). The default

setting is “off”.

on

Local

oFF

ExtClock

• Clock is “off” be default when

the power is initially turnd on.

• When Clock is turned “on”,

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT

playback cannot be started via

the panel [START/STOP] but-

ton, or started via the synchro

start function. Also, the MULTI

PAD playback cannot be initi-

ated by pressing the MULT

PADs.

• When External Clock is turned

“On”, “EC” will appear on the

TEMPO display, and tempo

cannot be changed with the

panel button.

95

MIDI Functions

■Bulk Data Send

This function causes the contents of the registration, user song, user style and

user pad memory to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. This data can

be saved to memory or disk via a MIDI sequence recorder or MIDI data

recorder, and then reloaded when required. The bulk data can also be sent

directly to a second PSR-530.

To send the bulk data select the “BlkSnd?” function, then press the [+] (YES)

button. “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press [+] (YES) again to begin

transmission of the bulk data. “BkSnd:Rg” (registration data), “BkSnd:Sg”

(user song data), “BkSnd:Pd” (user pad data) and then “BkSnd:Cs” (user style

data) will appear on the display during transmission. “End” will appear on the

display briefly when the transmission has finished.

• A bulk dump transmission can

be stopped at any time by

pressing the [–] (NO) button.

• No other operations can be

performed during bulk dump

transmission.

• During Style/Song/Multi Pad

playback or in one of the

Record modes, the display

shows “- - -: BlkSnd” indicating

that you cannot execute the

Bulk Data send operation.

YES

BlkSnd? Sure?

78

0

9

• No other operations can be

performed during bulk dump

reception.

• If an error is encountered dur-

ing bulk data reception, “Blk

Err” will appear on the display,

and registration, user song,

user style and user pad

memory will be cleared.

• When a bulk dump is re-

ceived, the received data re-

places any data that was pre-

viously in the PSR-530

memory.

• The bulk receive messages

are rejected during playback/

recording.

BkRcv

End

■Initial Data Send

Transmits all current panel settings to a second PSR-530 or a MIDI data

storage device. To send the initial data, select the “InitSnd?” function. Press the

[+] (YES) to begin transmission of the initial data.

YES

InitSnd?

●Receiving Bulk Data

The PSR-530 will automatically receive compatible bulk data from an

external MIDI device as long as no auto accompaniment, multi pad, or song

recording/playback operation is in progress. “BkRcv” will appear on the

display during reception, then “End” will appear briefly when all data has

been received.

If you want to have the song play back with the panel settings used for

recording, execute the Initial Data Send function before recording the perfor-

mance on the PSR-530 to an external sequencer.

• During Style/Song/Multi Pad

palyback or in one of the

Record modes, the display

shows “- - -: InitSnd?” indicat-

ing that you cannot execute

the initial data send operation.

96

Appendix

PSR-530 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE

VOICE GrandPno (R1 voice name) ...................................... R1 voice selection. ......................................... 17

STYLE 8BtPop1 (Style name) ............................................... Accompaniment style selection. ..................... 22

VirtArng ✩..............................................................Virtual Arranger on/off selection. .................... 27

Quantiz? * ...............................................................Quantize. ........................................................ 69

AllClr? * .................................................................. User style clear (All). ...................................... 70

TrkClr? * .................................................................. User style clear (Track). ................................. 70

Cancel * .................................................................... Drum cancel. .................................................. 68

SONG PeterGun (Song name)............................................ Song selection. ............................................... 52

Measure .................................................................... Measure from which to start playback. ........... 54

MinusCh [MinusOne] ✩.............................................. Minus-one channel setting. ............................ 55

A-b

:

Repeat ✩..........................................................Repeat playback setting. ................................ 57

SongClr? * ...............................................................Song clear. ..................................................... 63

TrkClr? * .................................................................. Track clear. ..................................................... 63

CARTRIDGE 530XG (Song name) .................................................... Cartridge song selection. ................................ 76

REGISTRATION MEMORY Bank 1 (Bank name) ...................................................Registration bank selection. ........................... 47

REGISTRATION MEMORY Button

MULTI PAD Fanfare1 (Multi Pad set name) ...............................Multi Pad set selection. .................................. 49

MULTI PAD STOP Button

Pad1Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 1). ............ 51

Pad2Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 2). ............ 51

Pad3Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 3). ............ 51

Pad4Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 4). ............ 51

BankClr? * ...............................................................Bank clear. ..................................................... 74

PadClr? * .................................................................. Pad clear. ....................................................... 74

MIDI Tr.Ch .......................................................................... Transmit channel selection............................. 92

Tr.Trk .......................................................................Transmit track selection. ................................93

Rcv.Ch .......................................................................Receive channel selection. ............................. 93

Rcv.Mod .................................................................... Receive mode selection. ................................ 94

Local .......................................................................... Local on/off selection...................................... 94

ExtClock ................................................................. External/internal clock selection. .................... 94

BlkSnd? .................................................................... Bulk dump transmission. ................................ 95

InitSnd? ................................................................. Initial panel setting transmission. ................... 95

ex

ex

ex

ex

ex

97

• Sub-menu items with a “

*

” appear only when the record mode is engaged.

• Sub-menu items with a “

✩

” appear only when the record mode is not engaged.

• Sub-menu items with “

” have shortcut access (press and hold the specified button for a few seconds to

jump directly to the associated sub-menu function). In addition to the shortuts listed above, the [DUAL VOICE]

button can be held to jump to the R2 voice revoice function, and the [SPLIT VOICE] button can be held to jump

to the L voice revoice function.

PSR-530 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

MENU SUB MENU FUNCTION PAGE

DIGITAL EFFECT Hall 1 [Reverb] (Reverb type name) .........................Reverb type selection. .................................... 37

REVERB Button

RevRtnLv ................................................................. Reverb return level setting. ............................ 38

Chorus1 [Chorus] (Chorus type name) ..................... Chorus type selection. .................................... 39

CHORUS Button

ChoRtnLv ................................................................. Chorus return level setting. ............................ 39

Hall 1 [DSP] (DSP type name).................................. DSP type selection. ........................................ 41

DSP Button

DspRtnLv ................................................................. DSP return level setting.................................. 42

Duet [Harmony] (Harmony type name) ....................... Harmony type selection. ................................. 43

HARMONY Button

HarmVol .................................................................... Harmony volume setting................................. 44

OVERALL TouchSns ................................................................. Touch sensitivity setting. ................................ 84

PBRange .................................................................... Pitch bend range setting................................. 45

Tuning ....................................................................... Overall tuning. ................................................ 84

SC.Note .................................................................... Scale tuning (note) setting. ............................. 84

SC.Tune .................................................................... Scale tuning (tune) setting. ............................. 84

SongTrns ................................................................. Song transpose setting................................... 85

Metronom ................................................................. Metronome on/off selection. ........................... 85

S.Split .................................................................... Split mode split point selection. ...................... 21

AccSpPnt ................................................................. Auto accompaniment split point selection. ..... 29

FngrngMd AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ......... Fingering mode selection. .............................. 30

ON/OFF Button

VoiceSet ................................................................. Voice set on/off selection. .............................. 85

ex

ex

ex

ex

98

Data Backup & Initialization

■Data Backup

Except for the data listed below, all PSR-530 panel settings are reset to their initial

settings whenever the power is turned on.

• Registration Memory

• User Song Data

• User Style Data

• User Pad Data

• MIDI Transmit Settings

• MIDI Receive Settings

The data listed above can be backed up — i.e. retained in memory — as long as a

working set of batteries is installed and you keep the following Off/On procedure.

zTurn the power OFF by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.

xUnplug the DC output cable of the PA-6 from the DC IN 10-12V jack on the rear

panel of the PSR-530.

cThen unplug the PA-6 Power Adaptor from the wall AC outlet.

When turning the power ON, simply reverse the procedure.

■Data Initialization

All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the

power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key on the keyboard. “CLr:Back up”

will appear briefly on the display.

• All registration and

song memory data,

plus the other set-

tings listed above,

will be erased and/or

changed when the

data initialization

procedure is carried

out.

• Carrying out the

data initialization

procedure will usu-

ally restore normal

operation if the PSR-

530 freezes or be-

gins to act errati-

cally for any reason.

ON

STAND BY

CLr

Back up

99

Voice List

■Maximum Polyphony

The PSR-530 has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it play a

maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used.

Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto

Accompaniment is used the total number of notes that can be played on the

keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Dual Voice,

Split Voice, Multi Pad, and Song functions.

• The Voice List includes MIDI program

change numbers for each voice. Use

these program change numbers when

playing the PSR-530 via MIDI from an

external device.

• Some voices may sound continuously

or have a long decay after the notes

have been released while the sustain

pedal (footswitch) is held.

[Panel Voice List]

Piano

1 0 112 0 Grand Piano

2 0 112 1 BrightPiano

3 0 112 3 Honky Tonk

4 0 112 2 Midi Grand

5 0 113 2 CP 80

6 0 114 4 Galaxy EP

7 0 112 5 DX Modern

8 0 112 4 Funk EP

9 0 115 5 Modern EP

10 0 113 5 Hyper Tines

11 0 116 5 New Tines

12 0 114 5 Venus EP

13 0 113 4 Tremolo EP

14 0 114 2 Rock Piano

15 0 112 7 Clavi

16 0 113 7 Wah Clavi

17 0 112 6 Harpsichord

18 0 113 6 GrandHarpsi

Chromatic Percussion

19 0 112 11 Vibraphone

20 0 113 11 Jazz Vibes

21 0 112 12 Marimba

22 0 112 13 Xylophone

23 0 112 114 Steel Drums

24 0 112 8 Celesta

25 0 112 9 Glocken

26 0 112 10 Music Box

27 0 112 14 TubularBells

28 0 112 108 Kalimba

29 0 112 47 Timpani

30 0 112 15 Dulcimer

Organ

31 0 112 16 Jazz Organ1

32 0 113 16 Jazz Organ2

33 0 112 17 Click Organ

34 0 113 17 Dance Organ

35 0 115 16 Drawbar Org

36 0 115 17 Mellow Draw

37 0 116 16 Bright Draw

38 0 112 18 Rock Organ1

39 0 113 18 Rock Organ2

40 0 114 18 Purple Org

41 0 116 17 60’s Organ

42 0 117 17 Blues Organ

43 0 117 16 16+1 Organ

44 0 118 16 16+2 Organ

45 0 119 16 16+4 Organ

46 0 118 17 Elec.Organ

47 0 114 16 TheatreOrg1

48 0 114 17 TheatreOrg2

49 0 112 19 Pipe Organ

50 0 113 19 ChapelOrgan

51 0 112 20 Reed Organ

52 0 113 21 Trad. Accrd

53 0 112 21 Musette

54 0 112 23 Tango Accrd

55 0 113 23 Bandoneon

56 0 114 21 Soft Accrd

57 0 112 22 Harmonica

Guitar

58 0 112 24 Classic Gtr

59 0 113 24 Spanish Gtr

60 0 112 25 Folk Guitar

61 0 113 25 12StrGuitar

62 0 112 26 Jazz Guitar

63 0 113 26 Octave Gtr

64 0 114 26 HawaiianGtr

65 0 112 27 CleanGuitar

66 0 113 27 Tremolo Gtr

67 0 114 27 Slap Guitar

68 0 113 28 Funk Guitar

69 0 112 28 MutedGuitar

70 0 113 29 FeedbackGtr

71 0 112 29 Overdrive

72 0 112 30 Distortion

73 0 115 27 PedalSteel

Bass

74 0 112 32 Aco.Bass

75 0 114 32 Bass&Cymbal

76 0 112 33 FingerBass

77 0 112 34 Pick Bass

78 0 112 35 Fretless

79 0 113 35 Jaco Bass

80 0 119 17 Organ Bass

81 0 112 36 Slap Bass

82 0 112 37 Funk Bass

83 0 113 36 Fusion Bass

84 0 112 38 Synth Bass

85 0 112 39 Analog Bass

86 0 113 39 Dance Bass

87 0 113 38 Hi Q Bass

88 0 114 38 Rave Bass

Solo Strings

89 0 112 40 Solo Violin

90 0 113 40 Soft Violin

91 0 112 110 Fiddle

92 0 112 41 Viola

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

100

Voice List

93 0 112 42 Cello

94 0 112 43 Contrabass

95 0 112 46 Harp

96 0 113 46 Hackbrett

97 0 112 106 Shamisen

98 0 112 107 Koto

99 0 112 104 Sitar

100 0 112 105 Banjo

Ensemble

101 0 112 48 Strings

102 0 113 48 OrchStrings

103 0 114 48 Symphon. Str

104 0 113 49 SlowStrings

105 0 114 49 Str.Quartet

106 0 115 48 ConcertoStr

107 0 115 49 MarcatoStrs

108 0 112 49 ChamberStrs

109 0 112 44 TremoloStrs

110 0 112 45 PizzStrings

111 0 112 50 Syn Strings

112 0 112 51 Analog Strs

113 0 112 52 Choir

114 0 112 54 Air Choir

115 0 113 52 Vocal Ensbl

116 0 112 53 Vox Humana

117 0 113 53 Gothic Vox

118 0 112 55 Orch.Hit

Solo Brass

119 0 112 56 SoloTrumpet

120 0 114 56 SoftTrumpet

121 0 113 56 Flugel Horn

122 0 112 59 Muted Trp

123 0 112 57 Trombone

124 0 114 57 MelTrombone

125 0 112 60 French Horn

126 0 112 58 Tuba

Brass Ensemble

127 0 113 61 BigBandBrs

128 0 112 61 BrasSection

129 0 116 61 MellowBrass

130 0 117 61 Small Brass

131 0 118 61 Pop Brass

132 0 119 61 MellowHorns

133 0 113 59 BallroomBrs

134 0 114 61 Full Horns

135 0 115 61 High Brass

136 0 113 57 Trb.Section

137 0 112 62 Synth Brass

138 0 112 63 Analog Brs

139 0 113 62 Jump Brass

140 0 114 62 TechnoBrass

Reed

141 0 112 64 Soprano Sax

142 0 112 65 Alto Sax

143 0 113 65 BreathyAlto

144 0 112 66 Tenor Sax

145 0 114 66 BreathTenor

146 0 112 67 BaritoneSax

147 0 116 66 Sax Section

148 0 112 71 Clarinet

149 0 113 71 MelClarinet

150 0 113 66 WoodwindEns

151 0 115 66 Brass Combo

152 0 112 68 Oboe

153 0 112 69 EnglishHorn

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

154 0 112 70 Bassoon

155 0 112 109 Bagpipe

Pipe

156 0 112 73 Flute

157 0 112 75 Pan Flute

158 0 112 72 Piccolo

159 0 113 73 EthnicFlute

160 0 112 77 Shakuhachi

161 0 112 78 Whistle

162 0 112 74 Recorder

163 0 112 79 Ocarina

Synth Lead

164 0 112 80 Square Lead

165 0 112 81 Saw.Lead

166 0 113 81 Big Lead

167 0 112 98 Stardust

168 0 114 81 Blaster

169 0 115 81 Analogon

170 0 113 80 Vintage Ld

171 0 113 98 Sun Bell

172 0 112 83 Aero Lead

173 0 116 81 Fire Wire

174 0 114 80 Mini Lead

175 0 115 80 Vinylead

176 0 117 81 Warp

177 0 116 80 Hi Bias

178 0 117 80 Meta Wood

179 0 118 80 Tiny Lead

180 0 118 81 Sub Aqua

181 0 119 81 Fargo

Synth Pad

182 0 113 94 Insomnia

183 0 112 90 Krypton

184 0 113 99 Cyber Pad

185 0 112 95 Wave 2001

186 0 112 94 Equinox

187 0 114 88 Stargate

188 0 112 92 DX Pad

189 0 112 93 Loch Ness

190 0 112 88 Fantasia

191 0 115 88 Golden Age

192 0 112 91 Xenon Pad

193 0 112 89 Area 51

194 0 112 99 Atmosphere

195 0 113 89 Dark Moon

196 0 115 94 Ionosphere

197 0 113 93 Phase IV

198 0 113 88 Symbiont

199 0 114 94 Solaris

200 0 113 95 Transform

Drum Kits

201 127 0 0 Std.Kit1

202 127 0 1 Std.Kit2

203 127 0 8 Room Kit

204 127 0 16 Rock Kit

205 127 0 24 Electro Kit

206 127 0 25 Analog Kit

207 127 0 27 Dance Kit

208 127 0 32 Jazz Kit

209 127 0 40 Brush Kit

210 127 0 48 Classic Kit

211 126 0 0 SFX Kit1

212 126 0 1 SFX Kit2

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

101

[XG Voice List]

Piano

213 0 0 0 GrandPno

214 0 1 0 GrndPnoK

215 0 18 0 MelloGrP

216 0 40 0 PianoStr

217 0 41 0 Dream

218 0 0 1 BritePno

219 0 1 1 BritPnoK

220 0 0 2 E.Grand

221 0 1 2 ElGrPnoK

222 0 32 2 Det.CP80

223 0 40 2 ElGrPno1

224 0 41 2 ElGrPno2

225 0 0 3 HnkyTonk

226 0 1 3 HnkyTnkK

227 0 0 4 E.Piano1

228 0 1 4 El.Pno1K

229 0 18 4 MelloEP1

230 0 32 4 Chor.EP1

231 0 40 4 HardEl.P

232 0 45 4 VX El.P1

233 0 64 4 60sEl.P

234 0 0 5 E.Piano2

235 0 1 5 El.Pno2K

236 0 32 5 Chor.EP2

237 0 33 5 DX Hard

238 0 34 5 DXLegend

239 0 40 5 DX Phase

240 0 41 5 DX+Analg

241 0 42 5 DXKotoEP

242 0 45 5 VX El.P2

243 0 0 6 Harpsi.

244 0 1 6 Harpsi.K

245 0 25 6 Harpsi.2

246 0 35 6 Harpsi.3

247 0 0 7 Clavi.

248 0 1 7 Clavi. K

249 0 27 7 ClaviWah

250 0 64 7 PulseClv

251 0 65 7 PierceCl

Chromatic Percussion

252 0 0 8 Celesta

253 0 0 9 Glocken

254 0 0 10 MusicBox

255 0 64 10 Orgel

256 0 0 11 Vibes

257 0 1 11 VibesK

258 0 45 11 HardVibe

259 0 0 12 Marimba

260 0 1 12 MarimbaK

261 0 64 12 SineMrmb

262 0 97 12 Balafon2

263 0 98 12 Log Drum

264 0 0 13 Xylophon

265 0 0 14 TubulBel

266 0 96 14 ChrchBel

267 0 97 14 Carillon

268 0 0 15 Dulcimer

269 0 35 15 Dulcimr2

270 0 96 15 Cimbalom

271 0 97 15 Santur

Organ

272 0 0 16 DrawOrgn

273 0 32 16 DetDrwOr

274 0 33 16 60sDrOr1

275 0 34 16 60sDrOr2

276 0 35 16 70sDrOr1

277 0 36 16 DrawOrg2

278 0 37 16 60sDrOr3

279 0 38 16 EvenBar

280 0 40 16 16+2’2/3

281 0 64 16 Organ Ba

282 0 65 16 70sDrOr2

283 0 66 16 CheezOrg

284 0 67 16 DrawOrg3

285 0 0 17 PercOrgn

286 0 24 17 70sPcOr1

287 0 32 17 DetPrcOr

288 0 33 17 LiteOrg

289 0 37 17 PercOrg2

290 0 0 18 RockOrgn

291 0 64 18 RotaryOr

292 0 65 18 SloRotar

293 0 66 18 FstRotar

294 0 0 19 ChrchOrg

295 0 32 19 ChurOrg3

296 0 35 19 ChurOrg2

297 0 40 19 NotreDam

298 0 64 19 OrgFlute

299 0 65 19 TrmOrgFl

300 0 0 20 ReedOrgn

301 0 40 20 Puff Org

302 0 0 21 Acordion

303 0 32 21 AccordIt

304 0 0 22 Harmnica

305 0 32 22 Harmo 2

306 0 0 23 TangoAcd

307 0 64 23 TngoAcd2

Guitar

308 0 0 24 NylonGtr

309 0 16 24 NylonGt2

310 0 25 24 NylonGt3

311 0 43 24 VelGtHrm

312 0 96 24 Ukulele

313 0 0 25 SteelGtr

314 0 16 25 SteelGt2

315 0 35 25 12StrGtr

316 0 40 25 Nyln&Stl

317 0 41 25 Stl&Body

318 0 96 25 Mandolin

319 0 0 26 Jazz Gtr

320 0 18 26 MelloGtr

321 0 32 26 JazzAmp

322 0 0 27 CleanGtr

323 0 32 27 ChorusGt

324 0 0 28 Mute.Gtr

325 0 40 28 FunkGtr1

326 0 41 28 MuteStlG

327 0 43 28 FunkGtr2

328 0 45 28 Jazz Man

329 0 0 29 Ovrdrive

330 0 43 29 Gt.Pinch

331 0 0 30 Dist.Gtr

332 0 40 30 FeedbkGt

333 0 41 30 FeedbGt2

334 0 0 31 GtrHarmo

335 0 65 31 GtFeedbk

336 0 66 31 GtrHrmo2

Bass

337 0 0 32 Aco.Bass

338 0 40 32 JazzRthm

339 0 45 32 VXUprght

340 0 0 33 FngrBass

341 0 18 33 FingrDrk

342 0 27 33 FlangeBa

343 0 40 33 Ba&DstEG

344 0 43 33 FngrSlap

345 0 45 33 FngBass2

346 0 65 33 ModAlem

347 0 0 34 PickBass

348 0 28 34 MutePkBa

349 0 0 35 Fretless

350 0 32 35 Fretles2

351 0 33 35 Fretles3

352 0 34 35 Fretles4

353 0 96 35 SynFretl

354 0 97 35 Smooth

355 0 0 36 SlapBas1

356 0 27 36 ResoSlap

357 0 32 36 PunchThm

358 0 0 37 SlapBas2

359 0 43 37 VeloSlap

360 0 0 38 SynBass1

361 0 18 38 SynBa1Dk

362 0 20 38 FastResB

363 0 24 38 AcidBass

364 0 35 38 Clv Bass

365 0 40 38 TeknoBa

366 0 64 38 Oscar

367 0 65 38 SqrBass

368 0 66 38 RubberBa

369 0 96 38 Hammer

370 0 0 39 SynBass2

371 0 6 39 MelloSB1

372 0 12 39 Seq Bass

373 0 18 39 ClkSynBa

374 0 19 39 SynBa2Dk

375 0 32 39 SmthBa 2

376 0 40 39 ModulrBa

377 0 41 39 DX Bass

378 0 64 39 X WireBa

Strings

379 0 0 40 Violin

380 0 8 40 SlowVln

381 0 0 41 Viola

382 0 0 42 Cello

383 0 0 43 Contrabs

384 0 0 44 Trem.Str

385 0 8 44 SlowTrStr

386 0 40 44 Susp Str

387 0 0 45 Pizz.Str

388 0 0 46 Harp

389 0 40 46 YangChin

390 0 0 47 Timpani

Ensemble

391 0 0 48 Strings1

392 0 3 48 S.Strngs

393 0 8 48 SlowStr

394 0 24 48 ArcoStr

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice List

102

Voice List

395 0 35 48 60sStrng

396 0 40 48 Orchestr

397 0 41 48 Orchstr2

398 0 42 48 TremOrch

399 0 45 48 VeloStr

400 0 0 49 Strings2

401 0 3 49 S.SlwStr

402 0 8 49 LegatoSt

403 0 40 49 Warm Str

404 0 41 49 Kingdom

405 0 64 49 70s Str

406 0 65 49 Str Ens3

407 0 0 50 Syn.Str1

408 0 27 50 ResoStr

409 0 64 50 Syn Str4

410 0 65 50 SS Str

411 0 0 51 Syn.Str2

412 0 0 52 ChoirAah

413 0 3 52 S.Choir

414 0 16 52 Ch.Aahs2

415 0 32 52 MelChoir

416 0 40 52 ChoirStr

417 0 0 53 VoiceOoh

418 0 0 54 SynVoice

419 0 40 54 SynVox2

420 0 41 54 Choral

421 0 64 54 AnaVoice

422 0 0 55 Orch.Hit

423 0 35 55 OrchHit2

424 0 64 55 Impact

Brass

425 0 0 56 Trumpet

426 0 16 56 Trumpet2

427 0 17 56 BriteTrp

428 0 32 56 WarmTrp

429 0 0 57 Trombone

430 0 18 57 Trmbone2

431 0 0 58 Tuba

432 0 16 58 Tuba 2

433 0 0 59 Mute.Trp

434 0 0 60 Fr.Horn

435 0 6 60 FrHrSolo

436 0 32 60 FrHorn2

437 0 37 60 HornOrch

438 0 0 61 BrasSect

439 0 35 61 Tp&TbSec

440 0 40 61 BrssSec2

441 0 41 61 HiBrass

442 0 42 61 MelloBrs

443 0 0 62 SynBras1

444 0 12 62 QuackBr

445 0 20 62 RezSynBr

446 0 24 62 PolyBrss

447 0 27 62 SynBras3

448 0 32 62 JumpBrss

449 0 45 62 AnaVelBr

450 0 64 62 AnaBrss1

451 0 0 63 SynBras2

452 0 18 63 Soft Brs

453 0 40 63 SynBrss4

454 0 41 63 ChoirBrs

455 0 45 63 VelBrss2

456 0 64 63 AnaBrss2

Reed

457 0 0 64 SprnoSax

458 0 0 65 Alto Sax

459 0 40 65 Sax Sect

460 0 43 65 HyprAlto

461 0 0 66 TenorSax

462 0 40 66 BrthTnSx

463 0 41 66 SoftTenr

464 0 64 66 TnrSax 2

465 0 0 67 Bari.Sax

466 0 0 68 Oboe

467 0 0 69 Eng.Horn

468 0 0 70 Bassoon

469 0 0 71 Clarinet

Pipe

470 0 0 72 Piccolo

471 0 0 73 Flute

472 0 0 74 Recorder

473 0 0 75 PanFlute

474 0 0 76 Bottle

475 0 0 77 Shakhchi

476 0 0 78 Whistle

477 0 0 79 Ocarina

Synth Lead

478 0 0 80 SquareLd

479 0 6 80 Square 2

480 0 8 80 LMSquare

481 0 18 80 Hollow

482 0 19 80 Shmoog

483 0 64 80 Mellow

484 0 65 80 SoloSine

485 0 66 80 SineLead

486 0 0 81 Saw.Lead

487 0 6 81 Saw 2

488 0 8 81 ThickSaw

489 0 18 81 DynaSaw

490 0 19 81 DigiSaw

491 0 20 81 Big Lead

492 0 24 81 HeavySyn

493 0 25 81 WaspySyn

494 0 40 81 PulseSaw

495 0 41 81 Dr. Lead

496 0 45 81 VeloLead

497 0 96 81 Seq Ana

498 0 0 82 CaliopLd

499 0 65 82 Pure Pad

500 0 0 83 Chiff Ld

501 0 64 83 Rubby

502 0 0 84 CharanLd

503 0 64 84 DistLead

504 0 65 84 WireLead

505 0 0 85 Voice Ld

506 0 24 85 SynthAah

507 0 64 85 VoxLead

508 0 0 86 Fifth Ld

509 0 35 86 Big Five

510 0 0 87 Bass &Ld

511 0 16 87 Big&Low

512 0 64 87 Fat&Prky

513 0 65 87 SoftWurl

Synth Pad

514 0 0 88 NewAgePd

515 0 64 88 Fantasy2

516 0 0 89 Warm Pad

517 0 16 89 ThickPad

518 0 17 89 Soft Pad

519 0 18 89 SinePad

520 0 64 89 Horn Pad

521 0 65 89 RotarStr

522 0 0 90 PolySyPd

523 0 64 90 PolyPd80

524 0 65 90 ClickPad

525 0 66 90 Ana Pad

526 0 67 90 SquarPad

527 0 0 91 ChoirPad

528 0 64 91 Heaven2

529 0 66 91 Itopia

530 0 67 91 CC Pad

531 0 0 92 BowedPad

532 0 64 92 Glacier

533 0 65 92 GlassPad

534 0 0 93 MetalPad

535 0 64 93 Tine Pad

536 0 65 93 Pan Pad

537 0 0 94 Halo Pad

538 0 0 95 SweepPad

539 0 20 95 Shwimmer

540 0 27 95 Converge

541 0 64 95 PolarPad

542 0 66 95 Celstial

Synth Effects

543 0 0 96 Rain

544 0 45 96 ClaviPad

545 0 64 96 HrmoRain

546 0 65 96 AfrcnWnd

547 0 66 96 Caribean

548 0 0 97 SoundTrk

549 0 27 97 Prologue

550 0 64 97 Ancestrl

551 0 0 98 Crystal

552 0 12 98 SynDrCmp

553 0 14 98 Popcorn

554 0 18 98 TinyBell

555 0 35 98 RndGlock

556 0 40 98 GlockChi

557 0 41 98 ClearBel

558 0 42 98 ChorBell

559 0 64 98 SynMalet

560 0 65 98 SftCryst

561 0 66 98 LoudGlok

562 0 67 98 XmasBell

563 0 68 98 VibeBell

564 0 69 98 DigiBell

565 0 70 98 AirBells

566 0 71 98 BellHarp

567 0 72 98 Gamelmba

568 0 0 99 Atmosphr

569 0 18 99 WarmAtms

570 0 19 99 HollwRls

571 0 40 99 NylonEP

572 0 64 99 NylnHarp

573 0 65 99 Harp Vox

574 0 66 99 AtmosPad

575 0 67 99 Planet

576 0 0 100 Bright

577 0 64 100 FantaBel

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

103

578 0 96 100 Smokey

579 0 0 101 Goblins

580 0 64 101 GobSyn

581 0 65 101 50sSciFi

582 0 66 101 Ring Pad

583 0 67 101 Ritual

584 0 68 101 ToHeaven

585 0 70 101 Night

586 0 71 101 Glisten

587 0 96 101 BelChoir

588 0 0 102 Echoes

589 0 8 102 EchoPad2

590 0 14 102 Echo Pan

591 0 64 102 EchoBell

592 0 65 102 Big Pan

593 0 66 102 SynPiano

594 0 67 102 Creation

595 0 68 102 Stardust

596 0 69 102 Reso Pan

597 0 0 103 Sci-Fi

598 0 64 103 Starz

Ethnic

599 0 0 104 Sitar

600 0 32 104 DetSitar

601 0 35 104 Sitar 2

602 0 96 104 Tambra

603 0 97 104 Tamboura

604 0 0 105 Banjo

605 0 28 105 MuteBnjo

606 0 96 105 Rabab

607 0 97 105 Gopichnt

608 0 98 105 Oud

609 0 0 106 Shamisen

610 0 0 107 Koto

611 0 96 107 T. Koto

612 0 97 107 Kanoon

613 0 0 108 Kalimba

614 0 0 109 Bagpipe

615 0 0 110 Fiddle

616 0 0 111 Shanai

617 0 64 111 Shanai2

618 0 96 111 Pungi

619 0 97 111 Hichriki

Percussive

620 0 0 112 TnklBell

621 0 96 112 Bonang

622 0 97 112 Gender

623 0 98 112 Gamelan

624 0 99 112 S.Gamlan

625 0 100 112 Rama Cym

626 0 101 112 AsianBel

627 0 0 113 Agogo

628 0 0 114 SteelDrm

629 0 97 114 GlasPerc

630 0 98 114 ThaiBell

631 0 0 115 WoodBlok

632 0 96 115 Castanet

633 0 0 116 TaikoDrm

634 0 96 116 Gr.Cassa

635 0 0 117 MelodTom

636 0 64 117 Mel Tom2

637 0 65 117 Real Tom

638 0 66 117 Rock Tom

639 0 0 118 Syn.Drum

640 0 64 118 Ana Tom

641 0 65 118 ElecPerc

642 0 0 119 RevCymbl

Sound Effects

643 0 0 120 FretNoiz

644 0 0 121 BrthNoiz

645 0 0 122 Seashore

646 0 0 123 Tweet

647 0 0 124 Telphone

648 0 0 125 Helicptr

649 0 0 126 Applause

650 0 0 127 Gunshot

SFX

651 64 0 0 CuttngNz

652 64 0 1 CttngNz2

653 64 0 3 Str Slap

654 64 0 16 Fl.KClik

655 64 0 32 Rain

656 64 0 33 Thunder

657 64 0 34 Wind

658 64 0 35 Stream

659 64 0 36 Bubble

660 64 0 37 Feed

661 64 0 48 Dog

662 64 0 49 Horse

663 64 0 50 Bird 2

664 64 0 54 Ghost

665 64 0 55 Maou

666 64 0 64 Tel.Dial

667 64 0 65 DoorSqek

668 64 0 66 Door Slam

669 64 0 67 Scratch

670 64 0 68 Scratch 2

671 64 0 69 WindChm

672 64 0 70 Telphon2

673 64 0 80 CarEngin

674 64 0 81 Car Stop

675 64 0 82 Car Pass

676 64 0 83 CarCrash

677 64 0 84 Siren

678 64 0 85 Train

679 64 0 86 Jetplane

680 64 0 87 Starship

681 64 0 88 Burst

682 64 0 89 Coaster

683 64 0 90 SbMarine

684 64 0 96 Laughing

685 64 0 97 Scream

686 64 0 98 Punch

687 64 0 99 Heart

688 64 0 100 FootStep

689 64 0 112 MchinGun

690 64 0 113 LaserGun

691 64 0 114 Xplosion

692 64 0 115 FireWork

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice Bank Select MIDI

Voice Name

Number MSB LSB

Program

Change

Number

Voice List

104

Drum Kit List

• “<——” indicates that the drum kit is the same as “Standard Kit1”.

• Each percussion voice uses one note.

• The note numbers and note names printed on the keyboard are one octave higher than

the MIDI note numbers and note names shown in the list. For example, the note number

and note name, #36 and C1, on the keyboard correspond to the MIDI note number and

note name, #24 and C0, shown in the list.

• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously.

13 C#-1 *3 Surdo Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

14 D-1 *3 Surdo Open <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

15 D#-1 Hi Q <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

16 E-1 Whip Slap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

17 F-1 *4 Scratch Push <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

18 F#-1 *4 Scratch Pull <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

19 G-1 Finger Snap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

20 G#-1 Click Noise <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

21 A-1 Metronome Click <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

22 A#-1 Metronome Bell <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

23 B-1 Seq Click L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

24 C0 Seq Click H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

25 C#0 Brush Tap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

26 D0 Brush Swirl L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

27 D#0 Brush Slap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

28 E0 Brush Swirl H <—— <—— <—— Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal

29 F0 Snare Roll Snare Roll 2 <—— <—— <—— <——

30 F#0 Castanet <—— <—— <—— Hi Q Hi Q

31 G0 Snare L Snare L 2 <—— SD Rock M Snare M SD Rock H

32 G#0 Sticks <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

33 A0 Bass Drum L <—— <—— Bass Drum M Bass Drum H 4 Bass Drum M

34 A#0 Open Rim Shot Open Rim Shot 2 <—— <—— <—— <——

35 B0 Bass Drum M Bass Drum M 2 <—— Bass Drum H 3 BD Rock BD Analog L

36 C1 Bass Drum H Bass Drum H 2 BD Room BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H

37 C#1 Side Stick <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Side Stick

38 D1 Snare M Snare M 2 SD Room L SD Rock SD Rock L Analog Snare L

39 D#1 Hand Clap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

40 E1 Snare H Snare H 2 SD Room H SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare H

41 F1 Floor Tom L <—— Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1

42 F#1 *1 Hi-Hat Closed <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog HH Closed 1

43 G1 Floor Tom H <—— Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2

44 G#1 *1 Hi-Hat Pedal <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog HH Closed 2

45 A1 Low Tom <—— Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3

46 A#1 *1 Hi-Hat Open <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog HH Open

47 B1 Mid Tom L <—— Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4

48 C2 Mid Tom H <—— Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5

49 C#2 Crash Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Cymbal

50 D2 High Tom <—— Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6

51 D#2 Ride Cymbal 1 <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

52 E2 Chinese Cymbal <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

53 F2 Ride Cymbal Cup <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

54 F#2 Tambourine <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

55 G2 Splash Cymbal <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

56 G#2 Cowbell <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Cowbell

57 A2 Crash Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

58 A#2 Vibraslap <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

59 B2 Ride Cymbal 2 <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

60 C3 Bongo H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

61 C#3 Bongo L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

62 D3 Conga H Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga H

63 D#3 Conga H Open <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga M

64 E3 Conga L <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Conga L

65 F3 Timbale H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

66 F#3 Timbale L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

67 G3 Agogo H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

68 G#3 Agogo L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

69 A3 Cabasa <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

70 A#3 Maracas <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Maracas

71 B3 Samba Whistle H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

72 C4 Samba Whistle L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

73 C#4 Guiro Short <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

74 D4 Guiro Long <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

75 D#4 Claves <—— <—— <—— <—— Analog Claves

76 E4 Wood Block H <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

77 F4 Wood Block L <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

78 F#4 Cuica Mute <—— <—— <—— Scratch Push Scratch Push

79 G4 Cuica Open <—— <—— <—— Scratch Pull Scratch Pull

80 G#4 *2 Triangle Mute <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

81 A4 *2 Triangle Open <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

82 A#4 Shaker <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

83 B4 Jingle Bell <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

84 C5 Bell Tree <—— <—— <—— <—— <——

85 C#5

86 D5

87 D#5

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5

91 G5

Voice # 201 202 203 204 205 206

Bank MSB# 127 127 127 127 127 127

Bank LSB# 000000

Program Change# 0 1 8 16 24 25

MIDI Standard Kit 1 Standard Kit 2 Room Kit Rock Kit Electronic Kit Analog Kit

Note# Note

105

Drum Kit List

13 C#-1 *3 <—— <—— <—— <——

14 D-1 *3 <—— <—— <—— <——

15 D#-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

16 E-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

17 F-1 *4 <—— <—— <—— <——

18 F#-1 *4 <—— <—— <—— <——

19 G-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

20 G#-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

21 A-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

22 A#-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

23 B-1 <—— <—— <—— <——

24 C0 <—— <—— <—— <——

25 C#0 <—— <—— <—— <——

26 D0 <—— <—— <—— <——

27 D#0 <—— <—— <—— <——

28 E0 Reverse Cymbal <—— <—— <——

29 F0 <—— <—— <—— <——

30 F#0 Hi Q <—— <—— <——

31 G0 AnSD Snappy <—— Brush Slap L <——

32 G#0 <—— <—— <—— <——

33 A0 AnBD Dance-1 <—— <—— Bass Drum L2

34 A#0 AnSD OpenRim <—— <—— <——

35 B0 AnBD Dance-2 <—— <—— Gran Casa

36 C1 AnBD Dance-3 BD Jazz BD Soft Gran Casa Mute Guitar Cutting Noise Dial Tone

37 C#1 Analog Side Stick <—— <—— <—— Guitar Cutting Noise 2 Door Creaking

38 D1 AnSD Q SD Jazz L Brush Slap Marching Sn M Door Slam

39 D#1 <—— <—— <—— <—— String Slap Scratch

40 E1 AnSD Ana+Acoustic SD Jazz H Brush Tap Marching Sn H Scratch 2

41 F1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Windchime

42 F#1 *1 AnHH Closed-3 <—— <—— <—— Telephone Ring2

43 G1 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2

44 G#1 *1 Analog HH Closed 2 <—— <—— <——

45 A1 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3

46 A#1 *1 AnHH Open-2 <—— <—— <——

47 B1 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4

48 C2 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5

49 C#2 Analog Cymbal <—— <—— Hand Cym.Open L

50 D2 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6

51 D#2 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cym.Closed L

52 E2 <—— <—— <—— <—— FL.Key Click Engine Start

53 F2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Tire Screech

54 F#2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Car Passing

55 G2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Crash

56 G#2 Analog Cowbell <—— <—— <—— Siren

57 A2 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cym.Open H Train

58 A#2 <—— <—— <—— <—— Jetplane

59 B2 <—— <—— <—— Hand Cym.Closed H Starship

60 C3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Burst Noise

61 C#3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Coaster

62 D3 Analog Conga H <—— <—— <—— SvMarine

63 D#3 Analog Conga M <—— <—— <——

64 E3 Analog Conga L <—— <—— <——

65 F3 <—— <—— <—— <——

66 F#3 <—— <—— <—— <——

67 G3 <—— <—— <—— <——

68 G#3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Rain Laughing

69 A3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Thunder Screaming

70 A#3 Analog Maracas <—— <—— <—— Wind Punch

71 B3 <—— <—— <—— <—— Stream Heartbeat

72 C4 <—— <—— <—— <—— Bubble Footsteps

73 C#4 <—— <—— <—— <—— Feed

74 D4 <—— <—— <—— <——

75 D#4 Analog Claves <—— <—— <——

76 E4 <—— <—— <—— <——

77 F4 <—— <—— <—— <——

78 F#4 Scratch Push <—— <—— <——

79 G4 Scratch Pull <—— <—— <——

80 G#4 *2 <—— <—— <—— <——

81 A4 *2 <—— <—— <—— <——

82 A#4 <—— <—— <—— <——

83 B4 <—— <—— <—— <——

84 C5 <—— <—— <—— <—— Dog Machine Gun

85 C#5Horse Gallop Laser Gun

86 D5 Bird 2 Explosion

87 D#5FireWork

88 E5

89 F5

90 F#5Ghost

91 G5 Maou

Voice # 207 208 209 210 211 212

Bank MSB# 127 127 127 127 126 126

Bank LSB# 000000

Program Change# 27 32 40 48 0 1

MIDI Dance Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Classic Kit SFX 1 SFX 2

Note# Note

106

There are three types of digital effects installed in the PSR-530: the reverb effect (system

effect), the chorus effect (system effect) and the DSP effect (can be set as either as a system effect

or insertion effect).

There are basically two ways to use the effects: with the DSP effect set as a system effect or

as a insertion effect. Each different way will be explained here.

Although not all the effect settings cannot be made by operating the PSR-530 panel manually,

some of them may be accessible through MIDI.

■When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect

DSP

(VARIATION)

REVERB

send chorus to reverb

send variation to chorus

send variation to reverb

DRY LINE

PAN

reverb

return

reverb

pan

OUTPUT

The bold lines are stereo lines.

CHORUS

chorus

return

chorus

pan

DSP

return

variation

pan

DSP send

DSP send

DSP send

rev send

rev send

rev send

cho send

cho send

cho send

dry level

dry level

dry level

dry level

DSP send

rev send

cho send

PAN

PAN

PAN

volume expression

PAN

volume expression

PAN

volume expression

PAN

volume expression

L Voice

All tracks that

can be revoiced.

R1 Voice

R2 Voice

MIDI Channel 1

MIDI Channel 16

• The three PSR-530 effects will be connected as shown below.

• The signal will enter reverb/chorus/DSP according to the send level set for each, and the signal with the effect

applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb/chorus/DSP send levels are set for

each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb/chorus/DSP return levels value are set in common for

all the parts.

• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb, chorus and DSP at the output for their signals. Using

MIDI, the panning position for the effect can be set (page 115).

• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 115) signal is transmitted to the PSR-530 from an external MIDI device,

a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series). Also, if a “Send Variation (DSP) to

Reverb” (page 116) signal is transmitted, a signal can be sent from the DSP to the reverb and in the same

way if a “Send Variation (DSP) to Chorus” signal (page 116) is transmitted a signal can be sent from DSP to

the chorus. If these signals are used, the three effects can be connected in series, or used separately, and

a lot of different effects can be produced.

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

107

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

■When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect

• The three PSR-530 effects will be connected as shown below.

• The signal will enter reverb and chorus according to the send level set for each, and the signal with the effect

applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb and chorus send levels are set for

each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb and chorus return level value is set in common for all the

parts.

• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb and chorus at the output for their signals. Using MIDI,

the panning position for the effect can be set (page 115).

• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 115) signal is transmitted to the PSR-530 from an external MIDI device,

a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series).

• The signal will enter DSP with the Dry/Wet (send level) that is set, and a signal with the effect applied will be

output. The DSP Dry/Wet (send level) is set for only R1 voice with the Revoice mode. The DSP return level

cannot be set.

rev send

cho send

dry

reverb

return

chorus

return

send chorus to reverb

DRY LINE

PAN

reverb

pan

chorus

pan

OUTPUT

The bold lines are stereo lines.

rev send

cho send

dry

rev send

cho send

dry

rev send

cho send

dry

variation part

L Voice

All tracks that

can be revoiced.

Variation is valid for

only one part.

R1 Voice

R2 Voice

DSP

DSP

variation on/off

DSP on/off

PAN

volume expression

PAN

volume expression

PAN

volume expression

PAN

volume expression

REVERB

CHORUS

PAN

DSP Dry/Wet

MIDI Channel 1

MIDI Channel 16

108

About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

The Digital Effect List

No. Effect Type Features

REVERB

01~04 Hall1~4 System Concert hall reverb.

05~08 Room1~4 System Small room reverb.

09, 10 Stage1, 2 System Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12 Plate1, 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb.

13 OFF — No effect.

CHORUS

01~05 Chorus1~5 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

06~09 Flanger1~4 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

10 OFF — No effect.

DSP

01~04 Hall1~4 System Concert hall reverb.

05~08 Room1~4 System Small room reverb.

09, 10 Stage1, 2 System Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12 Plate1, 2 System Simulated steel plate reverb.

13, 14 Early Reflection1, 2 System Early reflections only.

15 Gate Reverb System Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special

effects.

16 Reverse Gate System Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb.

17~21 Chorus1~5 System Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

22~25 Flanger1~4 System Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

26 Symphonic System Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

27 Phaser System Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

28~32 Rotary Speaker 1~5 Insertion Rotary speaker simulation.

33, 34 Tremolo 1, 2 Insertion Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

35 Guitar Tremolo Insertion Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

36 Auto Pan Insertion Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right,

front, back).

37 Auto Wah Insertion Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

38 Delay L, C, R System Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

39 Delay L, R System Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

40 Echo System Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel.

41 Cross Delay System Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and

right channels.

42 Distortion Hard Insertion Hard-edge distortion.

43 Distortion Soft Insertion This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard.

44 EQ Disco Insertion Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies.

45 EQ Telephone Insertion Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate

the sounds through telephone.

46 OFF — No effect.

109

Troubleshooting

Something not working as it should? In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can

be traced to a simple error that can be remedied immediately. Before assuming that your PSR-

530 is faulty, please check the following points.

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION

The speakers produce a “pop” sound whenever the power is

turned ON or OFF. This is normal and is no cause for alarm.

The volume is reduced or the sound is distorted.

The registration memory doesn’t work properly.

Recorded song data will not play back properly.

The display goes bland and all panel controls are reset.

The batteries probably need to be replaced. Either replace all six

batteries, or use an AC power adaptor.

No sound when the keyboard is played.

The R1/R2/L voice volume settings could be set too low. Make sure

the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (pages 14, 79).

The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local

Control is turned on (page 94).

Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.

Auto Accompaniment seems to “skip” when the keyboard is

played.

You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the

PSR-530. The PSR-530 can play up to 32 notes at the same time

— including split, dual, auto-accompaniment, song, and multi

pad notes. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.

Auto Accompaniment doesn’t sound when started. The MIDI Clock mode may be set to “on”. Make sure it is turned

“off” (page 94).

Auto accompaniment won’t function properly. No lower key-

board sound.

Make sure that all accompaniment tracks are turned on, and that

the they are all set to appropriate volume levels.

Make sure you are using fingerings recognized by the selected

fingering mode, and are playing in the Auto Accompaniment

section of the keyboard.

Are you sure you’re playing in the Auto-Accompaniment section

of the keyboard? Make sure that the Auto Accompaniment split

point is set appropriately (page 29).

Are you playing chords that the PSR-530 can recognize (see

chord types on page 30)?

The Harmony function will not turn on.

Harmony cannot be turned on when the FULL KEYBOARD

fingering mode is selected or if a percussion kit voice is selected.

Select an appropriate fingering mode or voice.

A cartridge style or song cannot be selected or will not play

properly.

Make sure that an appropriate Yamaha Music Cartridge is

properly plugged into the cartridge slot (page 75), or the

cartridge contacts are dirty. Try re-inserting the cartridge. If the

contacts are dirty removing and inserting the cartridge several

times will sometimes solve the problem. If this doesn’t work, try

wiping the cartridge connectors carefully with a soft, dry cloth.

Operation of the sustain pedal is reversed.

Sustain pedal operation will be reversed if you turn on the power

or plug in the pedal while pressing the pedal. For normal

operation turn off the power then turn it back on while the pedal

is not pressed.

Individual registration or song memory data transmitted via bulk

dump from an external sequencer or other device is not received

by the PSR-530.

Transmit the data with no more than a 2-second break between

blocks, or transmit as entirely separate data.

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch. Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to “0”

(page 84).

110

(1) TRANSMIT FLOW

MIDI ← NOTE ON/OFF 9nH

OUT

CONTROL CHANGE BnH

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

SOSTENUTE BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

RPN LSB BnH, 64H

RPN MSB BnH, 65H

PITCH BEND SENS BnH, 65H, 00H, 64H, 00H, 06H, mmH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

PITCH BEND EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

<YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT>

<UNIVERSAL>

UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

<XG STANDARD>

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

SPECIAL OPERATORS

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

MIDI Data Format

(2) RECEIVE FLOW

MIDI → NOTE OFF 8nH

IN

NOTE ON/OFF 9nH

CONTROL CHANGE

BANK SELECT MSB BnH,00H

BANK SELECT LSB BnH,20H

MODULATION BnH,01H

PORTAMENTO TIME BnH,05H

DATA ENTRY MSB BnH,06H

DATA ENTRY LSB BnH,26H

MAIN VOLUME BnH,07H

PANPOT BnH,0AH

EXPRESSION BnH,0BH

SUSTAIN BnH,40H

PORTAMENTO BnH,41H

SOSTENUTO BnH,42H

SOFT PEDAL BnH,43H

HARMONIC CONTENT BnH,47H

RELEASE TIME BnH,48H

ATTACK TIME BnH,49H

BRIGHTNESS BnH,4AH

PORTAMENTO CONTROL BnH,54H

REVERB SEND LEVEL BnH,5BH

CHORUS SEND LEVEL BnH,5DH

VARIATION SEND LEVEL BnH,5EH

DATA INCREMENT BnH,60H

DATA DECREMENT BnH,61H

NRPN LSB BnH,62H

NRPN MSB BnH,63H

VIBRATO RATE BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DEPTH BnH,63H,01H,62H,09H,06H,mmH

VIBRATO DELAY BnH,63H,01H,62H,0AH,06H,mmH

FILTER CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,01H,62H,20H,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,01H,62H,21H,06H,mmH

AEG ATTACK TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,63H,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY TIME BnH,63H,01H,62H,64H,06H,mmH

AEG RELEASE BnH,63H,01H,62H,66H,06H,mmH

DRUM INST

CUTOFF FREQ. BnH,63H,14H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

FILTER RESONANCE BnH,63H,15H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

AEG ATTACK RATE BnH,63H,16H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

AEG DECAY RATE BnH,63H,17H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PITCH COARSE BnH,63H,18H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal

numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexadecimal numbers

may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can freely be defined as any

whole number.

To enter data/values, refer to the table below.

• Except the table above, for example 144-159 (decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001

1111 (binary) displays the Note On Message for each channel (1-16). 176-

191/BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for

each channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100 1111 displays the

Program Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000

denotes the start of a System Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111

denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message.

• aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address

contains High, Mid, and Low.

• bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.

• ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.

• ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

0 00 0000 0000

1 01 0000 0001

2 02 0000 0010

3 03 0000 0011

4 04 0000 0100

5 05 0000 0101

6 06 0000 0110

7 07 0000 0111

8 08 0000 1000

9 09 0000 1001

10 0A 0000 1010

11 0B 0000 1011

12 0C 0000 1100

13 0D 0000 1101

14 0E 0000 1110

15 0F 0000 1111

16 10 0001 0000

17 11 0001 0001

18 12 0001 0010

19 13 0001 0011

20 14 0001 0100

21 15 0001 0101

22 16 0001 0110

23 17 0001 0111

24 18 0001 1000

25 19 0001 1001

26 1A 0001 1010

27 1B 0001 1011

28 1C 0001 1100

29 1D 0001 1101

30 1E 0001 1110

31 1F 0001 1111

32 20 0010 0000

33 21 0010 0001

34 22 0010 0010

35 23 0010 0011

36 24 0010 0100

37 25 0010 0101

38 26 0010 0110

39 27 0010 0111

40 28 0010 1000

41 29 0010 1001

42 2A 0010 1010

43 2B 0010 1011

44 2C 0010 1100

45 2D 0010 1101

46 2E 0010 1110

47 2F 0010 1111

48 30 0011 0000

49 31 0011 0001

50 32 0011 0010

51 33 0011 0011

52 34 0011 0100

53 35 0011 0101

54 36 0011 0110

55 37 0011 0111

56 38 0011 1000

57 39 0011 1001

58 3A 0011 1010

59 3B 0011 1011

60 3C 0011 1100

61 3D 0011 1101

62 3E 0011 1110

63 3F 0011 1111

Decimal Hexadecimal Binary

64 40 0100 0000

65 41 0100 0001

66 42 0100 0010

67 43 0100 0011

68 44 0100 0100

69 45 0100 0101

70 46 0100 0110

71 47 0100 0111

72 48 0100 1000

73 49 0100 1001

74 4A 0100 1010

75 4B 0100 1011

76 4C 0100 1100

77 4D 0100 1101

78 4E 0100 1110

79 4F 0100 1111

80 50 0101 0000

81 51 0101 0001

82 52 0101 0010

83 53 0101 0011

84 54 0101 0100

85 55 0101 0101

86 56 0101 0110

87 57 0101 0111

88 58 0101 1000

89 59 0101 1001

90 5A 0101 1010

91 5B 0101 1011

92 5C 0101 1100

93 5D 0101 1101

94 5E 0101 1110

95 5F 0101 1111

96 60 0110 0000

97 61 0110 0001

98 62 0110 0010

99 63 0110 0011

100 64 0110 0100

101 65 0110 0101

102 66 0110 0110

103 67 0110 0111

104 68 0110 1000

105 69 0110 1001

106 6A 0110 1010

107 6B 0110 1011

108 6C 0110 1100

109 6D 0110 1101

110 6E 0110 1110

111 6F 0110 1111

112 70 0111 0000

113 71 0111 0001

114 72 0111 0010

115 73 0111 0011

116 74 0111 0100

117 75 0111 0101

118 76 0111 0110

119 77 0111 0111

120 78 0111 1000

121 79 0111 1001

122 7A 0111 1010

123 7B 0111 1011

124 7C 0111 1100

125 7D 0111 1101

126 7E 0111 1110

127 7F 0111 1111

111

PITCH FINE BnH,63H,19H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

LEVEL BnH,63H,1AH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

PANPOT BnH,63H,1CH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

REVERB SEND BnH,63H,1DH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

CHORUS SEND BnH,63H,1EH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

VARIATION SEND BnH,63H,1FH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

RPN LSB BnH,64H

RPN MSB BnH,65H

PITCH BEND SENS. BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH

FINE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,01H,06H,mmH,

26H,llH

COARSE TUNING BnH,65H,00H,64H,02H,06H,mmH

NULL BnH,65H,7FH,64H,7FH

ALL SOUND OFF BnH,78H,00H

RESET ALL CONTROLLERS BnH,79H,00H

ALL NOTES OFF BnH,7BH

OMNI OFF BnH,7CH

OMNI ON BnH,7DH

MONO BnH,7EH

POLY BnH,7FH

PROGRAM CHANGE CnH

CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH DnH

PITCH BEND CHANGE EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

<YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT>

<UNIVERSAL>

UNIVERSAL REALTIME F0H 7FH.....F7H

UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 4EH.....F7H

<XG STANDARD>

XG PARAMETER CHANGE F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH

.....ddH F7H

XG BULK DUMP F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH

aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H

PARAMETER REQUEST F0H 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

DUMP REQUEST F0H 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H

SPECIAL OPERATORS

Others

SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

MIDI CLOCK F8H

START FAH

STOP FCH

ACTIVE SENSING FEH

(3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA

(3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES

(3-1-1) NOTE OFF (Recive only)

STATUS 1000nnnn (8nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv v: ignored

(3-1-2) NOTE ON/OFF

STATUS 1001nnnn (9nH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NOTE NUMBER 0kkkkkkk k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)

VELOCITY 0vvvvvvv (v ≠ 0) NOTE ON

00000000 (v = 0) NOTE OFF

(3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE

STATUS 1100nnnn (CnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp p = 0 - 127

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence

P = 0 Standard Kit

P = 1 Standard2 Kit

P = 8 Room Kit

P = 16 Rock Kit

P = 24 Elctrnic Kit

P = 25 Analog Kit

P = 27 Dance Kit

P = 32 Jazz Kit

P = 40 Brush Kit

P = 48 Classic Kit

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG SFX KIT number correspondence

P = 1 SFX1 Kit

P = 2 SFX2 Kit

When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM

VOICE is received, the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the

new DRUM VOICE.

(3-1-4) CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH (Recive only)

STATUS 1101nnnn (DnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = 0 - 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE

(3-1-5) PITCH BEND CHANGE

STATUS 1110nnnn (EnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

LSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB

MSB 0vvvvvvv PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB

(3-1-6) CONTROL CHANGE

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv

* Transmit CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v = 0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94

VARIATION SEND LEVEL

; v = 0 - 127

* Receive CONTROL NUMBER.

c = 0 BANK SELECT MSB ; v = 0:XG NORMAL,

64:SFX NORMAL,

126:XG SFX KIT,

127:XG DRUM

c = 32 BANK SELECT LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *3

c = 1 MODULATION ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 5 PORTAMENTO TIME ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 6 DATA ENTRY MSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 38 DATA ENTRY LSB ; v = 0 - 127 *1

c = 7 MAIN VOLUME ; v = 0 - 127

c = 10 PANPOT ; v = 0 - 127

c = 11 EXPRESSION ; v = 0 - 127

c = 64 SUSTAIN ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 65 PORTAMENTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 66 SOSTENUTO ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 67 SOFT PEDAL ; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON *2

c = 71 HARMONIC CONTENT ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 72 RELEASE TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 73 ATTACK TIME ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 74 BRIGHTNESS ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63 *2

c = 84 PORTAMENT CONTROL ; v = 0 - 127 *2

c = 91 REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 93 CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

c = 94

VARIATION SEND LEVEL

; v = 0 - 127

(When only Connection = 1[System])

c = 96 DATA INCREMENT ; v = 127 *1

c = 97 DATA DECREMENT ; v = 127 *1

*1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN, NRPN.

*2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice.

*3 MSB=0, anything other than 63 is 0.

• Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received, the BANK SELECT

operation will be suspended. When a Voice, including VOICE BANK, is

changed, set the BANK SELECT and Program Change Message, and

transmit in the following order, BANK SELECT MSB, LSB, PROGRAM

CHANGE.

• MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth.

• PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the

Portamento Switch = ON. 0 being the shortest time, and 127 being the

longest.

• PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in

relation to the preset value.

• Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is

used.

• HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that

is set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the

value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. As values get higher the sound

becomes increasingly eccentric. Note that for some voices the effective

parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range.

• RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by

the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment.

MIDI Data Format

112

MIDI Data Format

• ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the

voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment.

• BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut-off frequency set by the

voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64

producing 0 adjustment. Lower voices produce a softer sound. For some

voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal

parameter range.

(3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc c = CONTROL NUMBER

CONTROL VALUE 0vvvvvvv v = DATA VALUE

(3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 78H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On

conditions established by Channel Messages.

(3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 79H , DATA VALUE = 0)

Resets controllers as follows.

PITCH BEND CHANGE 0 (Center)

AFTER TOUCH 0 (min.)

MODULATION 0 (min.)

EXPRESSION 127 (max.)

SUSTAIN 0 (off)

SOSTENUTO 0 (off)

SOFT PEDAL 0 (off)

NRPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

RPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)

PORTAMENT CONTROL Resets portamento source note number

PORTAMENTO 0 (off)

(3-2-3) ALL NOTES OFF (Recive only)

(CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Switches off all of the channel’s “on” notes. However, any notes being held by

SUSTAIN or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO goes off.

(3-2-4)

OMNI OFF (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(3-2-5)

OMNI ON (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Notes Off. Omni On is not executed.

(3-2-6)

MONO (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH , DATA VALUE = 0-16)

Same processing as for All Notes Off. If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0-16 the

corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 4 (m=1).

(3-2-7) POLY (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH , DATA VALUE = 0)

Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be

changed to Mode 3.

(3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (RPN)

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

RPN LSB 01100100 (64H)

RPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = RPN LSB (refer to the list below)

RPN MSB 01100101 (65H)

RPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq q = RPN MSB (refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110 (06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

DATA ENTRY LSB 00100110 (26H)

DATA VALUE 0lllllll l = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for

data entry MSB/LSB.

RPN D.ENTRY

LSB MSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

00H 00H mmH — PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)

01H 00H mmH llH FINE TUNE

{mmH,llH} = {00H,00H} - {40H,00H} - {7FH,7FH}

(-8192*100/8192) - 0 - (+8192*100/8192)

02H 00H mmH — COARSE TUNE

28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones)

7FH 7FH — — NULL

Clears the current RPN number setting. Does not change the internal parameter settings.

(3-4) NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (NRPN) (Recive only)

STATUS 1011nnnn (BnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

NRPN LSB 01100010 (62H)

NRPN LSB NUMBER 0ppppppp p = NRPN LSB (refer to the list below)

NRPN MSB 01100011 (63H)

NRPN MSB NUMBER 0qqqqqqq q = NRPN MSB (refer to the list below)

DATA ENTRY MSB 00000110 (06H)

DATA VALUE 0mmmmmmm m = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data

entry MSB/LSB.

NRPN D.ENTRY

MSB LSB MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME DATA RANGE

01H 08H mmH — VIBRATO RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 09H mmH — VIBRATO DEPTH 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 0AH mmH — VIBRATO DELAY 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 20H mmH —

FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 21H mmH — FILTER RESONANCE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 63H mmH — EG ATTACK TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 64H mmH — EG DECAY TIME 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

01H 66H mmH — EG RELEASE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

14H rrH mmH —

DRUM FILTER CUTOFF FREQ.

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

15H rrH mmH —

DRUM FILTER RESONANCE

00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

16H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

17H rrH mmH — DRUM AEG DECAY RATE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

18H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH COARSE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

19H rrH mmH — DRUM PITCH FINE 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)

1AH rrH mmH — DRUM LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1CH rrH mmH — DRUM PANPOT 00H ,01H - 40H - 7FH

(random,left - center - right)

1DH rrH mmH —

DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1EH rrH mmH —

DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

1FH rrH mmH —

DRUM VARIATION SEND LEVEL

00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

The MSG14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set

with a drum voice.

rrH : drum instrument note number

(3-5) SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES

(3-5-1) MIDI CLOCK

STATUS 11111000 (F8H)

Transmission: 96 clocks per measure are transmitted.

Reception: If the instrument’s clock is set to external, after FAH is received from the

external device the instrument’s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure

received from the external device.

Decides whether the internal clock, or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will

be used.

(3-5-2) START

STATUS 11111010 (FAH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Auto accompaniment or Song

playback is started.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Auto accompaniment, Song Playback, or

Song Rec will start. FAH can only be received when External Clock is ON.

(3-5-3) STOP

STATUS 11111100 (FCH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped.

Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will

stop.

(3-5-4) ACTIVE SENSING

STATUS 11111110 (FEH)

Transmission: Transmitted approximately once every 200msec.

Reception: Sensing is started once this Code is received. If Status or Data is not

received within 400ms, the MIDI Receive Buffer will be cleared, and all notes,

including those being sustained, will be cut OFF. Also, all control values will be reset

to their factory defaults.

(3-6) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

(3-6-1) YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT

(3-6-1-1) SECTION CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 00

0sssssss SS Switch No.

00H : INTRO A

01H~07H : INTRO B

08H : MAIN A

09H~0FH : MAIN B

10H : FILL IN AA

11H~17H : FILL IN BB

18H : FILL IN AB

19H~1FH : FILL IN BA

20H : ENDING A

21H~27H : ENDING B

0ddddddd DD Switch On/Off : 00H (Off),7FH (On)

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When an ON code is received, the appointed section will be changed.

113

(3-6-3-1-2) XG PARMETER CHANGE

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes.

For more information on Address and Parameters, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >

(pages 115 ~ 118).

The 4 data types listed below are transmitted and received.

(These are transmitted only after a Parameter change request is received.)

XG System Data

Multi Effect Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-2) XG BULK DUMP

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0000nnnn 0N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0bbbbbbb BB ByteCount

0bbbbbbb BB ByteCount

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

0ddddddd DD Data

| |

0ccccccc CC Check sum

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >

(pages

115 ~ 118).

The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and

Check Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits.

If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump, Bulk Request

will be received.

The Block is a unit that consists of the data, arranged in the list, as the Total Size.

The 5 data types listed below are transmitted and received.

(These are transmitted only after a Bulk Dump request is received.)

System Data

Multi Effect Data (Individual effect unit)

Multi Part Data (Individual part unit)

Drums Setup Data (Individual note unit)

System Information (Individual only)

(3-6-3-3) XG PARAMETER REQUEST (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0011nnnn 3n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >

(pages 115 ~ 118).

The 4 data types listed below are received.

System Data

Multi Effect Data

Multi Part Data

Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-4) XG DUMP REQUEST (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0010nnnn 2n Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

0aaaaaaa AA Address High

0aaaaaaa AA Address Mid

0aaaaaaa AA Address Low

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >

(pages

115 ~ 118).

(3-6-1-2) TEMPO CONTROL

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01111110 7E Style

00000000 01

0ttttttt TT Tempo4

0ttttttt TT Tempo3

0ttttttt TT Tempo2

0ttttttt TT Tempo1

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value.

Tempo Meta Event is a large data block (24-bit), it is divided into 4 groups with 7-bits

going into each of the Tempos 1-4 (4 receives the remaining 3 bits).

(3-6-2) UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE

(3-6-2-1) UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-1-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7F Universal Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00001001 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

or

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7F Universal Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00001001 04 Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=Master Volume

0sssssss SS Volume LSB

0ttttttt TT Volume MSB

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously.

The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (the ss value is ignored.)

(3-6-2-2) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE

(3-6-2-2-1) GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

01111111 7F ID of target Device

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

or

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01111110 7E Universal Non-Realtime

0xxxnnnn XN When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0.

X = don’t care

00001001 09 Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message

00000001 01 Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the System Mode will be changed to XG.

Except MIDI Master Tuning, all control data be reset to default values.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

The bank select message for the channel 10 and the NRPN messages are not received

in the GM mode.

(3-6-3) XG STANDARD

(3-6-3-1) XG PARAMETER CHANGE

(3-6-3-1-1) XG SYSTEM ON

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N Device Number

01001100 4C Model ID

00000000 00 Address High

00000000 00 Address Mid

01111110 7E Address Low

00000000 00 Data

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to

XG.Controllers will be reset, all values of Multi Part and Effect, and All System values

denoted by “XG” data within All System will be reset to default values in the table.

This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be

allowed before the next message is sent.

MIDI Data Format

114

MIDI Data Format

The 5 data types listed below are received.

System Data

Multi Effect Data (Individual module unit)

Multi Part Data (Individual part unit)

Drums Setup Data (Individual note unit)

System Information

(3-6-4) SPECIAL OPERATORS

(3-6-4-1) VOLUME ,EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTROL OFF

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01000101 45 CVP-98/96/94/92 ID

00010001 11 Sub ID

0000nnnn 0N N = MIDI Channel

01001001 45 Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off

0vvvvvvv VV Value VV: 00H=on, 7FH=off

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When “On” is received, subsequent volume, expression, and PAN changes are only

valid after the reception of the next key on. Normal operation resumes when “Off” is

received.

(3-6-5) Others

(3-6-5-1) MIDI MASTER TUNING (Recive only)

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

0001nnnn 1N When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.

00100111 27 Model ID

00110000 30 Sub ID

00000000 00

00000000 00

0mmmmmmm MM Master Tune MSB

0lllllll LL Master Tune LSB

0ccccccc CC don’t care

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Changes tuning of all channels.

MM, LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value.

T = M-128

T : Tuning value (-100cent - +100cent)

M : A single byte value (28-228) consists of bytes 0-3 of MM = MSB, bytes 0-3 of LL = LSB.

In this setting, GM System ON, XG System ON will not be reset.

(3-6-5-2) Bulk Dump

User Song, User Style

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01001011 4B Model ID (PSR-530)

00110000 06 Bulk ID

0kkkkkkk KK Bulk No. (0AH;User Song, 07H;User Style)

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length (Date Length=LLLLLL HByte

0ddddddd DD Bulk Data

::

0ccccccc CC Check Sum

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Multi Pad, Registration Memory

binary hexadecimal

11110000 F0 Exclusive status

01000011 43 YAMAHA ID

01110011 73 Clavinova ID

01001011 4B Model ID (PSR-530)

00110000 06 Bulk ID

0kkkkkkk KK

Bulk No.(08H;Multi Pad, 09H;Registration Memory)

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length

0000llll 0L Data Length (Date Length=LLLL HByte)

0ddddddd DD Bulk Data

::

0ccccccc CC Check Sum

11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Bulk data cannot be sent when:

• in the Record Modes (Song, Style, Pad).

• song playback.

• accompaniment playback.

• multi pad playback.

• changing the registration number.

Bulk data cannot be received when:

• in the Record Modes (Song, Style, Pad).

• a frame appears around the voice icons and an user song is selected.

• song playback.

• accompaniment playback.

• multi pad playback.

• changing the registration number.

< Table 1-1> Parmeter Basic Address

Parameter Change

Address

(H) (M) (L) Description

SYSTEM 00 00 00 System

00 00 7D Drum Setup Reset

00 00 7E XG System On

00 00 7F All Parameter Reset

INFORMATION 01 00 00 System Information

EFFECT 1 02 01 00 Effect1 (Reverb,Chorus,Variation)

MULTI PART 08 00 00 Multi Part 1

:

08 0F 00 Multi Part 16

08 10 00 Reserved

::: :

DRUM 30 0B 00 Drum Setup 1 → Address Parameter

31 0B 00 Drum Setup 2 : :

3n 0B 00 note number 13

3n 0C 00 note number 14

::

3n 5B 00 note number 91

115

MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-2 > MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM) (With XG, GM On, it will not reset.)

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value (H)

00 00 00 4 0000 Master Tune -102.4..+102.3[cent] 00 04 00 00

01 ..07FF 1st bit3-0 -> bit15-12 (0400)

02 2nd bit3-0 -> bit11-8 (With XG, GM On, it will not reset.)

03 3rd bit3-0 -> bit7-4

4th bit3-0 -> bit3-0

04 1 00..7F Master Volume 0..127 7F

05 1 Not Used

06 1 28..58 Transpose -24..+24[semitones] 40

7D n Drum Setup Reset n=Drum Setup Number

7E 00 XG System On 00=XG Sytem on

7F 00 All Parameter Reset 00=on (receive only)

TOTAL SIZE 6

< Table 1-3 > MIDI Parameter table (System information) (Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description

(H) (H) (H)

01 00 00 E 20..7F Model Name 32..127 (ASCII)

:

0D

0E 1 00

0F 1 00

TOTAL SIZE 10

(Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)

< Table 1-4 > MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1)

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value (H)

02 01 00 2 00..7F Reverb Type MSB Refer to the Effect Type List 01 (=HALL1)

00..7F Reverb Type LSB : basic type 00

02 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 1 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

03 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 2 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

04 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 3 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

05 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 4 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

06 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 5 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

07 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 6 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

08 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 7 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

09 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 8 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0A 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 9 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0B 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 10 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

0C 1 00..7F Reverb Return -∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127) 60

0D 1 01..7F Reverb Pan L63..C..R63 (1..64..127) 40

TOTAL SIZE 0E

02 01 10 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 11 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

11 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 12 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

12 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 13 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

13 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 14 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

14 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 15 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

15 1 00..7F Reverb Parameter 16 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Reverb type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 20 2 00..7F Chorus Type MSB Refer to the Effect Type List

00..7F Chorus Type LSB : basic type 00

22 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 1 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

23 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 2 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

24 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 3 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

25 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 4 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

26 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 5 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

27 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 6 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

28 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 7 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

29 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 8 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2A 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 9 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2B 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 10 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

2C 1 00..7F Chorus Return -∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127) 60

2D 1 01..7F Chorus Pan L63..C..R63 (1..64..127) 40

2E 1 00..7F Send Chorus To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127) 00

TOTAL SIZE 0F

116

MIDI Data Format

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value (H)

02 01 30 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 11 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

31 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 12 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

32 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 13 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

33 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 14 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

34 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 15 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

35 1 00..7F Chorus Parameter 16 Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Chorus Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 40 2 00..7F Variation Type MSB Refer to the Effect Type List

00..7F Variation Type LSB : basic type 00

42 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 1 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 1 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

44 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 2 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 2 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

46 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 3 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 3 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

48 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 4 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 4 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4A 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 5 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 5 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4C 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 6 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 6 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

4E 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 7 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 7 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

50 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 8 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 8 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

52 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 9 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 9 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

54 2 00..7F Vari. Param. 10 MSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

00..7F Vari. Param. 10 LSB Refer to the Effect Parameter List Depend on Vari. Type

56 1 00..7F Variation Return -∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127) 60

57 1 01..7F Variation Pan L63..C..R63 (1..64..127) 40

58 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Reverb -∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127) 00

59 1 00..7F Send Vari. To Chorus -∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127) 00

5A 1 00..01 Variation Connection 0:insertion,1:system 00

5B 1 00..1F Variation Part part1..32 (0..31),off (127) 7F

5C 1 01..7F MW Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5D 1 01..7F PB Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5E 1 01..7F CAT Vari. Ctrl Depth -63..+63 40

5F 1 01..7F Not Used

60 1 01..7F Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 21

02 01 70 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 11 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

71 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 12 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

72 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 13 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

73 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 14 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

74 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 15 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

75 1 00..7F Variation Parameter 16 option Parameter Depend on Variation Type

TOTAL SIZE 6

< Table 1-5 > MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value (H)

08 nn 00 1 00..20 Element Reserve 0..32 0 (Part10),2 (Others)

nn 01 1 00..7F Bank Select MSB 0..127 7F (Part10),00 (Others)

nn 02 1 00..7F Bank Select LSB 0..127 00

nn 03 1 00..7F Program Number 1..128 00

nn 04 1 00..0F, Rcv Channel 0..16;1..16,127;off Part No.

7F

nn 05 1 00..01 Mono/Poly Mode 0:mono,1:poly 01

nn 06 1 00..02 Same Note Number 0:single 00

Key On Assign 1:multi

2:inst (for DRUM)

nn 07 1 00..02 Part Mode 0:normal 00 (Except Part 10.)

1:drum,drumS1..2 02 (Part10)

nn 08 1 28..58 Note Shift -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 09 2 00..FF Detune -12.8..+12.7[Hz] 08 00

nn 0A 1st bit3..0 -> bit7..4 (80)

2nd bit3..0 -> bit3..0

nn 0B 1 00..7F Volume 0..127 64

nn 0C 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Depth 0..127 40

nn 0D 1 00..7F Velocity Sense Offset 0..127 40

nn 0E 1 00..7F Pan 0:random 40

L63..C..R63 (1..64..127)

117

MIDI Data Format

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value (H)

nn 0F 1 00..7F Note Limit Low C-2..G8 00

nn 10 1 00..7F Note Limit High C-2..G8 7F

nn 11 1 00..7F Dry Level 0..127 7F

nn 12 1 00..7F Chorus Send 0..127 00

nn 13 1 00..7F Reverb Send 0..127 28

nn 14 1 00..7F Variation Send 0..127 00

nn 15 1 00..7F Vibrato Rate -64..+63 40

nn 16 1 00..7F Vibrato Depth -64..+63 40

nn 17 1 00..7F Vibrato Delay -64..+63 40

nn 18 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..+63 40

nn 19 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..+63 40

nn 1A 1 00..7F EG Attack Time -64..+63 40

nn 1B 1 00..7F EG Decay Time -64..+63 40

nn 1C 1 00..7F EG Release Time -64..+63 40

nn 1D 1 28..58 MW Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 1E 1 00..7F MW Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 1F 1 00..7F MW Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 20 1 00..7F MW LFO PMod Depth 0..127 0A

nn 21 1 00..7F MW LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 22 1 00..7F MW LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 23 1 28..58 Bend Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 42

nn 24 1 00..7F Bend Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 25 1 00..7F Bend Amp. Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 26 1 00..7F Bend LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 27 1 00..7F Bend LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 28 1 00..7F Bend LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

TOTAL SIZE 29

nn 30 Not Used

::

nn 40 Not Used

nn 41 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 42 1 00..7F Scale Tuning C# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 43 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 44 1 00..7F Scale Tuning D# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 45 1 00..7F Scale Tuning E -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 46 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 47 1 00..7F Scale Tuning F# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 48 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 49 1 00..7F Scale Tuning G# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4A 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4B 1 00..7F Scale Tuning A# -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4C 1 00..7F Scale Tuning B -64..+63[cent] 40

nn 4D 1 28..58 CAT Pitch Control -24..+24[semitones] 40

nn 4E 1 00..7F CAT Filter Control -9600..+9450[cent] 40

nn 4F 1 00..7F CAT Amplitude Control -100..+100[%] 40

nn 50 1 00..7F CAT LFO PMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 51 1 00..7F CAT LFO FMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 52 1 00..7F CAT LFO AMod Depth 0..127 00

nn 53 Not Used

::

66 Not Used

nn 67 1 00..01 Portamento Switch off/on 00

nn 68 1 00..7F Portamento Time 0..127 00

nn 69 Not Used

::

6E Not Used

TOTAL SIZE 3F

nn = PartNumber

If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.

• Bank Select LSB

• Amp EG

• Portamento

• Soft Pedal

• Mono/Poly

• Scale Tuning

118

XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT

Same as LSB=0

XG OPTION EFFECT

REVERB TYPE

* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.

* Panel Effects are based on the “[Number] Effect Name”.

* Using an external sequencer, capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, allows you to select the reverb, chorus and DSP effect types

which are not accessible from the PSR-530 panel operation. When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer, “XG Rev.,” “XG Cho.” or “XG Eff.” will be shown on the

display.

< Table 1-7 > Effect Type List

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

000 NO EFFECT

001 [1]HALL1 HALL2 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 [4]HALL4

002 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 [5]ROOM1 [6]ROOM2 [7]ROOM3 [8]ROOM4

003 STAGE1 STAGE2 [9]STAGE1 [10]STAGE2

004 PLATE [11]PLATE1 [12]PLATE2

005...015 NO EFFECT

016 WHITE ROOM

017 TUNNEL

018 CANYON

019 BASEMENT

020...127 NO EFFECT

CHORUS TYPE

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

000 NO EFFECT

001...064 NO EFFECT

065 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 [5]CHORUS5 CHORUS4

066 CELESTE1 [4]CHORUS4 CELESTE3 [2]CHORUS2 [3]CHORUS3 [1]CHORUS1

067 FLANGER 1 [9]FLANGER 4 [6]FLANGER1 [7]FLANGER2 [8]FLANGER3

068...127 NO EFFECT

MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-6 > MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP)

Address Size Data Parameter Name Description Default

(H) (H) (H) Value (H)

3n rr 00 1 00..7F Pitch Coarse -64..+63 40

3n rr 01 1 00..7F Pitch Fine -64..+63[cent] 40

3n rr 02 1 00..7F Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 03 1 00..7F Alternate Group 0:off,1..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 04 1 00..7F Pan 0:random Depend on the Note

L63..C..R63 (1..64..127)

3n rr 05 1 00..7F Reverb Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 06 1 00..7F Chorus Send Level 0..127 Depend on the Note

3n rr 07 1 00..7F Variation Send Level 0..127 7F

3n rr 08 1 00..01 Key Assign 0:single,1:multi 00

3n rr 09 1 00..01 Rcv Note Off off/on Depend on the Note

3n rr 0A 1 00..01 Rcv Note On off/on 01

3n rr 0B 1 00..7F Filter Cutoff Freq. -64..63 40

3n rr 0C 1 00..7F Filter Resonance -64..63 40

3n rr 0D 1 00..7F EG Attack Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0E 1 00..7F EG Decay1 Rate -64..63 40

3n rr 0F 1 00..7F EG Decay2 Rate -64..63 40

TOTAL SIZE 10

n:Drum Setup Number (0 - 1)

rr:note number (0DH - 5BH)

If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values.

According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.

119

DSP TYPE (0 — 63)

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

000 NO EFFECT

001 [1]HALL1 HALL2 [2]HALL2 [3]HALL3 [4]HALL4

002 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 [5]ROOM1 [6]ROOM2 [7]ROOM3 [8]ROOM4

003 STAGE1 STAGE2 [9]STAGE1 [10]STAGE2

004 PLATE [11]PLATE1 [12]PLATE2

005 “DELAY L,C,R” [38]Delay LCR

006 “[39]DELAY L,R”

007 [40]ECHO

008

[41]CROSS DELAY

009 [13]ER1 [14]ER2

010

[15]GATE REVERB

011

[16]REVERS GATE

012...019 NO EFFECT or

THRU

020 KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3

021...063 NO EFFECT or

THRU*

DSP TYPE (64 — 127)

TYPE TYPE LSB

MSB 00 01 02 03...07 08 09...15 16 17 18 19 20 21...

064 THRU

065 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 [21]CHORUS5 CHORUS4

066 CELESTE1 [20]CHORUS4 CELESTE3 [18]CHORUS2 [19]CHORUS3 [17]CHORUS1 [32]Rotary Sp5

067 FLANGER 1 [25]FLANGER 4 [22]FLANGER1 [23]FLANGER2 [24]FLANGER3

068 SYMPHONIC [26]Symphonic

069 ROTARY SP. [28]Rotary Sp1

070 TREMOLO [33]Tremolo1 [31]Rotary Sp4

071 AUTO PAN [36]AutoPan [29]Rotary Sp2 [30]Rotary Sp3 [34]Tremolo2 [35]Gtr Tremolo

072 [27]PHASER PHASER 2

073 DISTORTION

074 OVER DRIVE

075 AMP SIM. [42]DIST.HARD [43]DIST.SOFT

076 3BAND EQ [44]EQ DISCO [45]EQ TEL

077 2BAND EQ

078 AUTO WAH [37]Auto Wah

079...127 THRU

< Table 1-8 > Effect Parameter List

HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3, STAGE1,STAGE2, PLATE (reverb, variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Reverb Time 0.3 — 30.0s 0-69

2 Diffusion 0 — 10 0-10

3 Initial Delay 0 — 63 0-63

4 HPF Cutoff Thru — 8.0kHz 0-52

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k — Thru 34-60

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11 Rev Delay 0 — 63 0-63

12 Density 0 — 3 0-3

13 Er/Rev Balance E63 > R — E=R — E<R63 1-127

14

15 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

16

WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON, BASEMENT (reverb)

No. Parameter Value

1 Reverb Time 0.3 — 30.0s 0-69

2 Diffusion 0 — 10 0-10

3 Initial Delay 0 — 63 0-63

4 HPF Cutoff Thru — 8.0kHz 0-52

5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k — Thru 34-60

6 Width 0.5 — 10.2m 0-37

7 Heigt 0.5 — 20.2m 0-73

8 Depth 0.5 — 30.2m 0-104

9 Wall Vary 0 — 30 0-30

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11 Rev Delay 0 — 63 0-63

12 Density 0 — 3 0-3

13 Er/Rev Balance E63 > R — E=R — E<R63 1-127

14

15 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

16

MIDI Data Format

120

MIDI Data Format

DELAY L,C,R (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Lch Delay 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

2 Rch Delay 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

3 Cch Delay 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

4 Feedback Delay 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

5 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

6 Cch Level 0 — 127 0-127

7 High Damp 0.1 — 1.0 1-10

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

14 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

16 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

DELAY L,R (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Lch Delay 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

2 Rch Delay 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1 — 715.0ms 1-7150

5 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

6 High Damp 0.1 — 1.0 1-10

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

14 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

16 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

ECHO (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Lch Delay1 0.1 — 355.0ms 1-3550

2 Lch Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

3 Rch Delay1 0.1 — 355.0ms 1-3550

4 Rch Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

5 High Damp 0.1 — 1.0 1-10

6 Lch Delay2 0.1 — 355.0ms 1-3550

7 Rch Delay2 0.1 — 355.0ms 1-3550

8 Delay2 Level 0 — 127 0-127

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

14 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

16 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

CROSS DELAY (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 L -> R Delay 0.1 — 355.0ms 1-3550

2 R -> L Delay 0.1 — 355.0ms 1-3550

3 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

4 Input Select “L,R,L&R” 0-2

5 High Damp 0.1 — 1.0 1-10

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

14 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

16 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2(variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Type “S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr” 0-5

2 Room Size 0.1 — 7.0 0-44

3 Diffusion 0 — 10 0-10

4 Initial Delay 0 — 63 0-63

5 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru — 8.0kHz 0-52

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k — Thru 34-60

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11 Liveness 0 — 10 0-10

12 Density 0 — 3 0-3

13 High Damp 0.1 — 1.0 1-10

14

15

16

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Type “TypeA,TypeB” 0-1

2 Room Size 0.1 — 7.0 0-44

3 Diffusion 0 — 10 0-10

4 Initial Delay 0 — 63 0-63

5 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

6 HPF Cutoff Thru — 8.0kHz 0-52

7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k — Thru 34-60

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11 Liveness 0 — 10 0-10

12 Density 0 — 3 0-3

13 High Damp 0.1 — 1.0 1-10

14

15

16

KARAOKE1,2,3 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Delay Time 0 — 127 0-127

2 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

3 HPF Cutoff Thru — 8.0kHz 0-52

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k — Thru 34-60

5

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14

15

16

CHORUS1,2,3,4, CELESTE1,2,3,4 (chorus, variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

4 Delay Offset 0 — 127 0-127

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1

16

FLANGER1,2,3 (chorus, variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

4 Delay Offset 0 — 63 0-63

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14 LFO Phase Difference -180 — +180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4-124

15

16

SYMPHONIC (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3 Delay Offset 0 — 127 0-127

4

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14

15

16

121

MIDI Data Format

ROTARY SPEAKER (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3

4

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14

15

16

TREMOLO (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 AM Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3 PM Depth 0 — 127 0-127

4

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10

11

12

13

14 LFO Phase Difference -180 — +180deg(resolution=3deg.) 4-124

15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1

16

AUTO PAN (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 L/R Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3 F/R Depth 0 — 127 0-127

4 PAN Direction “L <-> R,L -> R,L <- R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R” 0-5

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

PHASER 1,2 (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3 Phase Shift Offset 0 — 127 0-127

4 Feedback Level -63 — +63 1-127

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11 Stage 6 — 10(phaser1) / 3 — 5(phaser2) 3-10

12 Diffusion mono/stereo 0-1

13 LFO Phase Difference -180 — +180deg.(resolution=3deg.) 4-124

14

15

16

DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Drive 0 — 127 0-127

2 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

3 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k — Thru 34-60

5 Output Level 0 — 127 0-127

6

7 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz — 10.0kHz 23-54

8 EQ Mid Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

9 EQ Mid Width 1.0 — 12.0 10-120

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0 — 127 0-127

12

13

14

15

16

AMP SIMULATOR (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 Drive 0 — 127 0-127

2 AMP Type “Off,Stack,Combo,Tube” 0-3

3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k — Thru 34-60

4 Output Level 0 — 127 0-127

5

6

7

8

9

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0 — 127 0-127

12

13

14

15

16

3BAND EQ(MONO) (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

2 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz — 10.0kHz 23-54

3 EQ Mid Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

4 EQ Mid Width 1.0 — 12.0 10-120

5 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

2BAND EQ(STEREO) (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

2 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

4 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

AUTO WAH (variation block)

No. Parameter Value

1 LFO Frequency 0.00Hz — 39.7Hz 0-127

2 LFO Depth 0 — 127 0-127

3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0 — 127 0-127

4 Resonance 1.0 — 12.0 10-120

5

6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz — 2.0kHz 8-40

7 EQ Low Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz — 16.0kHz 28-58

9 EQ High Gain –12 — +12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63 > W — D=W — D<W63 1-127

11

12

13

14

15

16

122

MIDI Implementation Chart

[Portable Keyboard] Date: 1997. 4. 14

Model: PSR-530 MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.0

Function Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic Default 1~16 CH (*1) 1~16 CH (*2)

Channel Changed 1~16 CH (*1) 1~16 CH (*2)

Default Mode 3 Mode 3

Mode Messages X X

Altered ***** X

Note 0~127 0~127

Number : True voice ***** 0~127

Velocity Note on O 9nH, v=1~127 O 9nH, v=1~127

Note off X 9nH, v=0 X

After key’s X X

Touch Ch’s X O

Pitch Bender O O

Control Change 0, 32 O O Bank select

1 X (*3) O Modulation

5 X O Portament time

7, 10, 11 O O

6, 38 X (*3) O Data entry

64, 65 O O

66, 67 X O

71 — 74 X (*3) O Sound controller

84 X (*3) O Portament control

91, 93, 94 O O Effect depth

96, 97 X O RPN increment, decrement

98, 99 X (*3) O NRPN LSB, MSB

100, 101 O O RPN LSB, MSB

120 X O All sound off

121 X O Reset all controllers

Program O 0~127 O 0~127

Change : True # *****

System Exclusive O O

System : Song Position X X

: Song Select X X

Common : Tune X X

System : Clock O O

Real Time : Commands O O

Aux : Local ON/OFF X X

: All Notes Off X O 123~127

Messages : Active Sense O O

: Reset X X

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO O : Yes

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO X : No

123

MIDI Implementation Chart

* 1 The tracks for each channel can be selected on the panel.

See page 92 for more information.

* 2 Incoming MIDI messages control the PSR-530 as 16 chan-

nel multi timbral tone generator when initially shipped

(factory set). The MIDI messages don’t affect the panel

controls including the Panel Voice selection since they are

directly sent to the tone generator of the PSR-530. However,

the following MIDI messages affects the panel controls

such as Panel Voice, Style, Multi Pad and Song settings:

• MIDI MASTER TUNE, MASTER TUNE (XG System

Parameter).

• TRANSPOSE (XG System Parameter).

• System Exclusive Messages related to the REVERB,

CHORUS and DSP EFFECT settings.

Also, the MIDI messages affect the panel settings when one

of the folowing MIDI reception modes is selected.

These modes can be selected on the panel (see page 94).

rE (Remote): The Note On/Off messages received at the

designated Remote (receive) channel are

processed the same as the notes normally

played on the keyboard.

In this mode, only the following channel mes-

sages will be recognized:

• Note On/Off

• Control Changes

Bank Select (R1 voice only)

Modulation

Volume

Expression

Sustain

Sostenute

Soft Pedal

All Notes Off

• Program Change (R1 voice only)

• Pitch Bend

Off: The MIDI channel messages will not be received at the

designated channel.

* 3 Though these messages will not output by playing the

keyboard and changing the panel settings, they may be

included in the Song or Style data and output.

124

Specifications

Song

• Song Volume

• Minus One Practice (Minus One Channel Setting)

• Repeat Play

• Revoice (User song only) : Volume, Octove, Pan, Reverb Send Level,

Chorus Send Level, DSP Send Level

Song Recording

• User Song : 4 Songs

• Recording Tracks : ACCOMPANIMENT, MELODY 1 — 4

• Song Clear, Track Clear

Style Recording

• User Style : 3 Styles

• Recording Tracks : 5 Sections x 8 Tracks

• Drum Cancel

• Quantize

• All Clear, Track Clear

Multi Pad Recording

• User Pad : 4 Pad Sets

• Chord Match

• Pad Clear, Bank Clear

MIDI

• Transmit Settings

• Receive Settings

• Local Control

• Clock

• Bulk Data Send/Receive

• Initial Data Send

Auxiliary Jacks

• DC IN 10-12V, PHONES, SUSTAIN, AUX OUT R, L/L+R,

MIDI IN/OUT, TO HOST

Amplifiers

• 6 W + 6 W (when using PA-6 power adaptor)

• 4 W + 4 W (when using batteries)

Speakers

• 12cm (4-3/4”) x 2

Power Consumption

• 22 W (when using PA-6 AC power adaptor)

Batteries

• Six SUM-1, “D” size, R-20 or equivalent batteries

Rated Voltage

• DC 10-12V

Dimensions (W x D x H)

• 952 x 387 x 147 mm

Weight

• 8.0 kg (13 lbs.) excluding batteries

Supplied Accessories

• Music Cartridge

• Music Stand

• Owner’s Manual

Optional Accessories

• Headphones : HPE-150

• AC Power Adaptor : PA-6

• Foot Switch : FC4, FC5

• Keyboard Stand : L-6

• Music Cartridge

* Specifications subject to change without notice.

Keyboards

• 61 standard-size keys (C1 — C6) with touch response.

Display

• Large multi-function LCD display

Setup

• Stand by/ON

• Master Volume : MIN — MAX

Control & Number Buttons

• MENU ▲▼, VOICE, STYLE, SONG, CARTRIDGE,

SUB MENU ▲▼, [1] — [0], [+] (YES), [–] (NO)

Cartridge Slot

Demo

• 12 Songs

Voice

• 200 Panel Voices +12 Drum Kits + 480 XG Voices

• Polyphony : 32

• Voice Set

• R1/R2/L Voices

• Revoice : Volume, Octave, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send

Level, DSP Send Level

• Split Voice Mode

• Dual Voice Mode

Auto Accompaniment

• 100 Styles

• Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF

• Accompaniment Track : RHYTHM1/2, BASS, CHORD1/2, PAD,

PHRASE1/2

• Accompaniment Track Settings : ON/OFF

• Accompaniment Control :SYNC START, SYNC STOP,

START/STOP, INTRO,

MAIN A/B (AUTO FILL), ENDING

• Beat Indicator

• Virtual Arranger ON/OFF

• Accompaniment Volume

• Revoice : Volume, Pan, Reverb Send Level, Chorus Send Level

• Virtual Arranger

One Touch Setting

Overall Controls

• Tempo : 32 — 280

• Pitch Bend Range

• Transpose

• Touch Sensitivity

• Master Tuning

• Scale Tuning

• Song Transpose

• Metronome

• Split Voice Split Point

• Accompaniment Split Point

• Fingering Mode :

SINGLE FINGER/FINGERED 1/FINGERED 2/

FULL KEYBOARD/MULTI-FINGER

• Voice Set

Digital Effect

• Reverb : 13 types

• Chorus : 10 types

• DSP (system/insertion) : 46 types

• Harmony : 16 types

Registration Memory

• 32 Regist Bank : 1 — 4

• Accompaniment Freeze

Multi Pads

• 36 Multi Pad Sets

• 4 Pads + STOP

• Chord Match

125

Index

AAC power adaptor ............................................................12

Accompaniment styles, cartridge ..................................... 77

Accompaniment tracks, song ........................................... 58

Auto accompaniment ....................................................... 22

Auto accompaniment on/off ............................................. 23

Auto Fill ............................................................................25

BBank, registration .............................................................47

Batteries........................................................................... 12

Beat indicator ................................................................... 25

Bulk data receive ............................................................. 95

Bulk data send ................................................................. 95

CCartridge accompaniment styles ..................................... 77

Cartridge song playback .................................................. 76

Chord Match function....................................................... 51

Chord types, auto accompaniment .................................. 32

Chorus ............................................................................. 38

Clock ................................................................................ 94

Connectors ...................................................................... 13

Contents ............................................................................ 4

DData Dial .......................................................................... 18

Demonstration playback .................................................. 14

Digital Effect ..................................................................... 36

Display operation ...............................................................8

Drum kit list .................................................................... 104

DSP ................................................................................. 40

Dual voice mode ..............................................................19

EEffects .............................................................................. 36

Ending, accompaniment .................................................. 26

FFeatures .............................................................................2

Fill-in ................................................................................ 25

Fingered 1 fingering mode ............................................... 32

Fingered 2 fingering mode ............................................... 33

Fingering modes, accompaniment................................... 31

Freeze (Accompaniment Freeze function) ....................... 48

Full Keyboard fingering mode .......................................... 33

GGM System Level 1 ............................................................3

HHarmony .......................................................................... 42

IIcons ..................................................................................8

Initial data send ................................................................95

Initialization (data backup) ............................................... 98

Insertion Effect ......................................................... 40, 107

Intro, accompaniment ...................................................... 24

KKeyboard percussion ....................................................... 19

LLocal control .................................................................... 94

MMain A & Main B sections ................................................ 25

Master tuning ................................................................... 84

Measure, song play from specified .................................. 54

Melody tracks, clearing .................................................... 63

Melody tracks, song ......................................................... 58

Menu structure .................................................................96

Menus ..............................................................................10

Metronome .......................................................................85

MIDI connectors............................................................... 88

MIDI data format ............................................................110

MIDI functions .................................................................. 92

MIDI implementation chart .............................................122

Minus-one practice .......................................................... 55

Multi pad set selection ..................................................... 49

Multi Pads, playing ........................................................... 50

Multi-finger fingering mode .............................................. 34

Music cartridges, handling ............................................... 75

Music stand........................................................................ 7

OOne touch setting .............................................................34

Overall functions .............................................................. 83

PPanel controls ....................................................................6

Phones jack ..................................................................... 13

Pitch Bend ....................................................................... 45

Polyphony ........................................................................ 99

Power supply ................................................................... 12

Precautions ........................................................................ 1

RR1, R2, & L voices ........................................................... 16

Receive channel & mode ................................................. 93

Record Ready Mode ............................................ 59, 65, 71

Registration memory........................................................ 47

Rehearsal mode .................................................. 61, 67, 73

Repeat play...................................................................... 57

Reverb ............................................................................. 36

Revoicing ......................................................................... 78

SScale tuning ..................................................................... 84

Shortcuts ......................................................................... 11

Single Finger fingering mode ........................................... 31

Song clear ........................................................................63

Song playback ................................................................. 52

Song playback, cartridge ................................................. 76

Song recording ................................................................ 58

Song, revoice ................................................................... 81

Specifications................................................................. 124

Split point, auto accompaniment...................................... 29

Split point, split voice ....................................................... 21

Split voice mode .............................................................. 20

Start modes, accompaniment .......................................... 24

Stop Accompaniment function ......................................... 34

Style selection.................................................................. 22

Style, revoice ................................................................... 80

Sustain jack ..................................................................... 13

Synchro Stop function ......................................................26

Synchronized start ........................................................... 24

System Effect........................................................... 40, 106

TTempo, accompaniment ................................................... 23

To Host............................................................................. 88

Touch sensitivity............................................................... 84

Track assignment, minus-one .......................................... 55

Track muting, accompaniment ......................................... 27

Transmit channel & track.................................................. 92

Transposition .................................................................... 46

Troubleshooting ............................................................. 109

VVirtual Arranger ............................................................... 27

Voice list........................................................................... 99

Voice set .......................................................................... 85

Voice, revoice ................................................................... 80

Voices, about the ............................................................. 16

Voices, selecting & playing .............................................. 17

Volume control, accompaniment...................................... 28

Volume control, song ....................................................... 53

Volume, harmony ............................................................. 44

XXG................................................................................ 3, 16

Limited Warranty

90 DAYS LABOR 1 YEAR PARTS

Yamaha Corporation of America, hereafter referred to as Yamaha, warrants to the original consumer of a product included in the categories listed below,

that the product will be free of defects in materials and/or workmanship for the periods indicated. This warranty is applicable to all models included in

the following series of products:

PSR SERIES OF PORTATONE ELECTRONIC KEYBOARDS

If during the first 90 days that immediately follows the purchase date, your new Yamaha product covered by this warranty is found to have a defect in

material and/or workmanship, Yamaha and/or its authorized representative will repair such defect without charge for parts or labor.

If parts should be required after this 90 day period but within the one year period that immediately follows the purchase date, Yamaha will, subject to

the terms of this warranty, supply these parts without charge. However, charges for labor, and/or any miscellaneous expenses incurred are the consumers

responsibility. Yamaha reserves the right to utilize reconditioned parts in repairing these products and/or to use reconditioned units as warranty

replacements.

THIS WARRANTY IS THE ONLY EXPRESS WARRANTY WHICH YAMAHA MAKES IN CONNECTION WITH THESE PRODUCTS.

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY APPLICABLE TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANT ABILITY IS

LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY. YAMAHA EXCLUDES AND SHALL NOT BE LIABLE IN ANY

EVENT FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

Some states do not allow limitations that relate to implied warranties and/or the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages. Therefore, these

limitations and exclusions may not apply to you.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CONSUMERS RESPONSIBILITIES

If warranty service should be required, it is necessary that the consumer assume certain responsibilities:

1. Contact the Customer Service Department of the retailer selling the product, or any retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product for assistance.

You may also contact Yamaha directly at the address provided below.

2. Deliver the unit to be serviced under warranty to: the retailer selling the product, an authorized service center, or to Yamaha with an explanation of

the problem. Please be prepared to provide proof purchase date (sales receipt, credit card copy, etc.) when requesting service and/or parts under

warranty.

3. Shipping and/or insurance costs are the consumers responsibility.* Units shipped for service should be packed securely.

*Repaired units will be returned PREPAID if warranty service is required within the first 90 days.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT ship anything to ANY location without prior authorization. A Return Authorization (RA) will be issued that has a

tracking number assigned that will expedite the servicing of your unit and provide a tracking system if needed.

4. Your owners manual contains important safety and operating instructions. It is your responsibility to be aware of the contents of this manual and to

follow all safety precautions.

EXCLUSIONS

This warranty does not apply to units whose trade name, trademark, and/or ID numbers have been altered, defaced, exchanged removed, or to failures

and/or damages that may occur as a result of:

1. Neglect, abuse, abnormal strain, modification or exposure to extremes in temperature or humidity.

2. Improper repair or maintenance by any person who is not a service representative of a retail outlet authorized by Yamaha to sell the product, an

authorized service center, or an authorized service representative of Yamaha.

3. This warranty is applicable only to units sold by retailers authorized by Yamaha to sell these products in the U.S.A., the District of Columbia, and

Puerto Rico. This warranty is not applicable in other possessions or territories of the U.S.A. or in any other country.

Please record the model and serial number of the product you have purchased in the spaces provided below.

Model___________________________ Serial #________________________________ Sales Slip #________________________________

Purchased from____________________________________________________________ Date______________________________________

(Retailer)

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

Electronic Service Division

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue

Buena Park, CA 90620

KEEP THIS DOCUMENT FOR YOUR RECORDS. DO NOT MAIL!

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the

authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha

ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Nie-

derlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

NORTH AMERICA

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

MEXICO

Yamaha de Mexico S.A. De C.V.,

Departamento de ventas

Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del

Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.

Tel: 686-00-33

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil LTDA.

Av. Rebouças 2636, São Paulo, Brasil

Tel: 011-853-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Argentina S.A.

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-371-7021

EUROPE

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

IRELAND

Danfay Ltd.

61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin

Tel: 01-2859177

GERMANY/SWITZERLAND

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Nederland

Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands

Tel: 030-2828411

BELGIUM

Yamaha Music Belgium

Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium

Tel: 02-7258220

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France,

Division Claviers

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

AFRICA

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

MIDDLE EAST

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,

F.R. of Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2312

ASIA

HONG KONG

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,

Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel: 2737-7688

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Cosmos Corporation

#131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul

Korea

Tel: 02-466-0021~5

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor,

Malaysia

Tel: 3-717-8977

PHILIPPINES

Yupangco Music Corporation

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,

Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines

Tel: 819-7551

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

Blk 202 Hougang, Street 21 #02-01,

Singapore 530202

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

10F, 150, Tun-Hwa Northroad,

Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2713-8999

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

121/60-61 RS Tower 17th Floor,

Ratchadaphisek RD., Dindaeng,

Bangkok 10320, Thailand

Tel: 02-641-2951

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

OCEANIA

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,

Australia

Tel: 3-699-2388

NEW ZEALAND

Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.

146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,

Auckland, New Zealand

Tel: 9-634-0099

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

International Marketing Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-2317

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: 053-460-3273

[PK] 13

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,

Home Keyboard Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN

Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.

Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain

Tel: 91-577-7270

PORTUGAL

Valentim de Carvalho CI SA

Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras,

Portugal

Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823

GREECE

Philippe Nakas S.A.

Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece

Tel: 01-364-7111

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Office

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

FINLAND

Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music

Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260

SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland

Tel: 0435 011

NORWAY

Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

ICELAND

Skifan HF

Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120

IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland

Tel: 525 5000

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Europa GmbH.

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of

Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha de Panama S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: 507-269-5311

M.D.G., EMI Division © 1997 Yamaha Corporation

VV67140 808POCP5.3-06F0 Printed in Japan